JP6815049B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

JP-A-2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
Fixing members arranged so that the whole can be seen,
With the first movable member, at least part of which is visibly arranged,
A second movable member that is difficult to see as a whole,
A gaming machine including a third movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see by the fixing member .
At least, the fixing member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the display means. With the third movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the above , it is possible to perform a coalescence effect representing a specific target.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of the 2nd prize winning apparatus. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol hit detection table and the like. It is 1st figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the ordinary symbol hit detection table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big prize opening opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit detection process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of the time saving counter. It is a 1st flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode status setting table. It is a figure for demonstrating the time saving effect scenario determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the time saving production scenario. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the expectation production of V. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the winning game production at the time of special drawing 2 winning. Special Figure 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation effect at the time of lottery. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the one-time production of crying. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement of the 1st movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination effect of the 1st movable accessory 14 and an image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 1st light emission mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd light emitting mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the variation timing change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the symbol direction change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the character symbol cooperation production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern mode change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern mode change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern mode change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern variation area effect A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern variation area effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern variation area effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation promotion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement production A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement production B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies this announcement effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation part image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect B of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance effect C of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the effect A inside and outside the outer shell of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outer shell inside and outside effect B of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outer shell inside and outside effect C of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the united effect A of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination production B of a movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the union effect C of a movable accessory. It is a figure exemplifying the first aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the third aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the 4th aspect of the 1st movable accessory of another embodiment. It is a figure exemplifying the image display effect A linked with the number of hold. It is a figure exemplifying the image display effect B linked with the number of hold. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number interlocking image display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the image display effect D linked with the number of hold. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number change interlocking effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number change interlocking effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number change interlocking effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold number change interlocking effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon movement change effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon movement change effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the hold icon movement change effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon movement change effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the variation middle order mode start display effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the variable middle-order mode start display effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the predetermined image continuous display effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the predetermined image continuous display effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the predetermined image continuous display effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the predetermined image continuous display effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the background image switching effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the background image switching effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the background image switching effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the image blur effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the image blur effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the image blur effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the image blur effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the winning notification effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect B. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the decorative pattern display area effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image production A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image production B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold correspondence image production D. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold image effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect A of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect B of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect C of the hold icon. It is a figure exemplifying the disappearance effect D of the hold icon. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon image display effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon image display effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon image display effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the hold icon image display effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the operation state suggestion effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the operation state suggestion effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the operation state suggestion effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the operation state suggestion effect D. It is a figure which illustrated the operation image stock effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the operation image stock effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the operation image stock effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the effect A which can be announced. It is a figure exemplifying the effect B which can announce the result. It is a figure exemplifying the effect C which can announce the result. It is a figure exemplifying the effect D which can be announced. It is a figure which illustrated the specific object display effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the specific object display effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the specific object display effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the specific object display effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the combination production A of a plurality of characters. It is a figure exemplifying the combination production B of a plurality of roles. It is a figure exemplifying the combination production C of a plurality of roles. It is a figure exemplifying the combination production D of a plurality of roles. It is a figure exemplifying the announcement Aori production A. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production B. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production C. It is a figure which exemplifies this announcement announcement Aori production D. It is a figure which illustrated the character selection effect A. It is a figure which illustrated the character selection effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the character selection effect C. It is a figure which illustrated the character selection effect D. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect A. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect B. It is a figure which illustrated the start port light emission effect C. It is a figure exemplifying the start port light emission effect D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine Based on FIGS. 1 and 2, the structure of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second prize-winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction as seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , Fixed winning device (navel) 19, normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, first gate (through chucker) 28, second gate (through chucker) 29, first big winning device (first attacker) ) 31, a second major winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are provided. Is configured to be capable of emitting light in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also called a hold icon or a variable icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. The middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the result of the big hit small hit lottery) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the result of the big hit / small hit lottery by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. In addition, when a small hit is won, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a random number. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol" or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect during the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the final stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). .. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the fixed stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semiring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( It is possible to move forward) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. In the first movable accessory 14, a ring-shaped decorative portion is formed when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It can stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion through which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion through which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a small number of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit small hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a random number or the like per special symbol and determining a big hit.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 24. A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advanced state). The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state). 2 It may be possible to enter the ball into the starting port 21.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the left side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3. Each is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gates (the first gate 28 and the second gate 29) is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 is an opportunity for obtaining a random number per normal symbol and determining the hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to a "big hit" or a "small hit". The lottery results of the "big hit" and the "small hit" are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

In addition, the "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is used as a predetermined "hit". It means a process of determining whether or not a hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to "." Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the ordinary symbol display 42 described later displays the variation of the ordinary symbol. Is performed, and when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the game area 3, and includes the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. There is. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33. A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is I have. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38. A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The second grand prize device 36 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a second grand prize opening sensor. It includes 35a, a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the second prize winning device 36 through which a game ball that has passed through the second prize opening 35 can pass. .. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to V the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state).

FIG. 2A shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of allowing the game ball to pass through the V region 39 (first state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the V region 39 after passing through the second special winning opening sensor 35a (FIG. 2A). Route A). The route of this game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 2B shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of hindering the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 (second state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to be non-V. It passes through the region 70 (Route B in FIG. 2B). The route of this game ball is called a "second route". In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the execution of the jackpot game (second special game) described later. That is, the winning or losing lottery of the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the passing of the game ball into the V region 39 is successful. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol described above is also referred to as "1 type jackpot", and the jackpot won by passing the game ball through the V area 39 is also referred to as "2 type jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two ordinary winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The number of ordinary winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for passing through the second gate 29 and winning a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the first gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit and small hit lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. A jackpot game (second special game) is performed to open the game. In addition, when the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol displayed as stopped (the type of the winning small hit) is used. A small hit game (first special game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. In addition, when a small hit (one of the multiple types of small hits described later) is won, the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left light up, such as "●●●● ○○ ●●". Display the small hit symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as random numbers per special symbol acquired for the winning (numerical information). ) Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are four for the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area. 85b is one. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special symbol hold" means to determine a random number or the like per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol hold and execute variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the execution of a medium or special game (big hit game or small hit game), the right to the big hit small hit lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. The game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "●● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a big hit / small hit lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the first gate sensor 28a, the second gate sensor 29a, the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, and the second Examples thereof include a large winning opening sensor 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the second special winning opening 35.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to the program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Includes) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) via the lamp control board 107. Control the lighting of lamps such as). That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) for determining the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and follows the operation pattern data of these movable accessories. Control the operation. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute command-based lamp lighting control and movable accessory operation control. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute the light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 6 (A)), a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5 A normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening. Command, round specification command, ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting wait command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal The symbol ending command etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a big hit flag, a big hit end flag, a small hit flag, a small hit end flag, V. A flag, a time saving flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (hold information) corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal figure hold. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is provided with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. Has been done.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 7 (A)) includes a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. Is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. .. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , Ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. It is stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106 are set in the sub control main process (described later). Yes, variable effect start command, variable effect end command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, ending effect start command, normal symbol variable effect start command, normal symbol variable effect end command, normal symbol opening effect start command, normal symbol The ending effect start command etc. are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , The first time saving effect counter, the second time saving effect counter, etc. are set. In the mode status set area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state (whether a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state described later) of the game machine 1 is set.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 8A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "special symbol per random number", "special symbol per type random number", "reach random number", "variable pattern random number", "ordinary symbol per random number", and "ordinary symbol per type". It is configured to acquire "random numbers" at the timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used in a lottery for whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (big hit small hit lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol hit type random number" is a random number used for a lottery (winning type determination) of the winning big hit or small hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit / small hit determination is lost, and is in the range of 0 to 127. Takes the value of. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol per random number" is a random number used in a winning lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) for whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "ordinary symbol per type random number" is a random number used for the lottery of the winning type (winning type determination) won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random number per special symbol", "Random number type per special symbol", "Reach random number", "Fluctuating pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Will be done. The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "random number per ordinary symbol" and the "random number per type per ordinary symbol" are acquired based on the passage of the gate (first gate 28 or second gate 29). The acquired random value per normal symbol and the random value per type of normal symbol are stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable effect pattern random number", a "time saving effect scenario random number", and a "look-ahead effect random number" at a timing described later. The “variable effect pattern random number” is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the time saving remaining number (display time saving remaining number) displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the fact that the variation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is acquired based on the output of the ending command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the random value per special symbol (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) is "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". It is a table referred to for determining which of the above is applicable. In FIG. 9A, in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is " In the case of "1000 to 10500", it is determined to be "small hit", and when the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 65535, it is determined to be "missing". .. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), if the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is "1000 to 16500". In that case, it is determined that it is a "small hit", and if the random number value per special symbol is a value other than the above among 0 to 65535, it is determined that it is "missing".

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 9B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach the time of loss than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

The special symbol per type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 is set to "big hit type" or "big hit type" according to the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "small hit type" and "special symbol type". In FIG. 10, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 15”, the big hit type is “15R time saving 99 times big hit”. It is determined that "A", and the stop symbol of special figure 1 (special figure 1 stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be "time saving symbol 1". When the special symbol hit type random value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". When the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot A", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 3". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "non-time saving state", the small hit type is different regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined that "16R normal small hit A (substantially impossible to pass 5R / V)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 without time reduction".

When the "big hit win" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times big hit C" , The special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 4". When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot B", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 5". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", the small hit type is "regardless of the random value of the special symbol hit type (any of 0 to 127)". It is determined that "16R normal small hit B (substantially impossible to pass 5R / V)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 2 without time reduction".

In FIG. 11, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 63”, the big hit type is “15R time saving 5 times big hit”. "C" is determined, and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure 2 stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "time saving symbol 6". When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 7". When the special symbol per type random value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot D", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when the special figure 2 lottery in the "non-time saving state" is "small hit winning" and the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined that "hit A (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol of special figure 2 is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 with time reduction" on the second special symbol display 41b. When the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time reduction 99 times small hit A (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction". It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 2 ”.

When the special figure 2 lottery in the "time saving state" is "big hit winning", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 79", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times big hit D". , Special figure 2 The stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 9". When the special symbol hit type random value is "80 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot B", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 10". When the special symbol per type random value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 11". On the other hand, when "small hit winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "time saving state", when the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small hit". It is determined that "B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 3 with time reduction". When the special symbol per type random value is "64 to 95", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time reduction 10 times small hit (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction available". It is determined as "small hit symbol 4". When the special symbol per type random value is "96 to 111", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time reduction 15 times small hit (actually 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction available". It is determined as "small hit symbol 5". When the special symbol per type random value is "112 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time reduction 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R / V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction". It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 6 ”. By referring to the special symbol per type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command, "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a “big hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and the fluctuation pattern random value is “111-127”, the fluctuation pattern Is shown to be determined as "P2". Further, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first starting port 20 is won, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". In the case of "~ 2", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Further, for example, when the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). ), It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17". As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). It is also determined whether or not there is a pseudo-ream when it becomes a super reach.

FIG. 13 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit type determination table T6. In 13 (C), a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is shown. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the random value per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "misses". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13 (A), in both the "non-time saving state" and the "time saving state", when the random number value per normal symbol is "0 to 254" in the lottery of the normal symbol (normal symbol), It is shown that it is determined to be "hit", and when the random value per normal symbol is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined to be "missing".

The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 includes "hit type" and "hit type" according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "the type of ordinary symbol". In FIG. 13 (B), when the lottery for the normal figure in the "non-time saving state" is won, if the random value of the normal symbol per type is "0 to 30", it is determined that the hit type is "long open 1". Then, the stop symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 1". When the normal symbol hit type random value is "100 to 170", the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 2". When the random value of the normal symbol per type random value is 0 to 65535 and is a numerical value other than the above, it is indicated that the hit type is determined to be "short open 2" and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3". Has been done. On the other hand, if the player wins the lottery for the regular figure in the "time saving state", it is determined that the winning type is "long open 2" regardless of the random value of the normal symbol per type (any of 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined as "hit symbol 4". By referring to the normal symbol per type determination table T6, it is possible to specify the "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map according to the lottery result and the winning type of the normal map in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 13C, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the non-time saving state is "hit" and the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "30 seconds". It is shown that Further, for example, it is shown that when the lottery result of the normal map in the time saving state is "missing", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the normal figure stop symbol (normal figure stop symbol data) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and for example, the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol”. When "4", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 14". FIG. 14B shows the contents of each opening pattern 11-14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second is opened once. In the opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls are won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 2).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. In the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9, in the main control main processing (described later) of the game control microcomputer 81, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening are according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the winning opening 35. In FIG. 15 (A), the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "16H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", " When it is "32H" or "33H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or "14H". When it is "17H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "24H", "25H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H". , It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 15B shows the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) is opened once in the 1st to 15th rounds and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 1.6 seconds is opened once in the 1st round, and the opening number is opened in the 2nd to 6th rounds. The first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened once (long opening), and at the 7th to 16th rounds, the opening time is once and the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 is 0.1 seconds. Open (short open). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, the second large winning opening 35 having an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 1.6 seconds is opened in the 1st round, and in the 2nd to 16th rounds, the opening pattern 23 is opened. The first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) once, with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum 9). It will be closed.

4. Explanation of big hits, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "misses" as a result of a special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the jackpot is won, the "big hit game (second special game)" that opens the first big winning opening 30 is executed with the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of the big hit) that is stopped and displayed. "Small hit game (1st special game)" that opens the 2nd big prize opening 35 once with the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) that is stopped and displayed when the small hit is won. Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. The "big hit game (second special game)" to be released is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game". Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot game". In addition, big hit games and small hit games are also called "special games". This special game may include a round in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open games) that open the first prize opening 30, the opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and after the final round game ends. Includes the ending (ED) of. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first winning opening 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small hit game consists of a small hit opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, an opening before the small hit opening game starts (interval before opening), and an ending (closed) after the small hit opening game ends. Post-interval) and.

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, as the jackpot type, "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot A to D" are set. Each of these jackpots is a jackpot that controls the game state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the first jackpot 30 is opened over 15R. .. On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of time reductions at which the "time reduction state and high base state" after the big hit game ends. Here, the "time reduction count" is the number of variable display (variable display) of the special symbol that can be executed in the "time reduction state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is preset for each jackpot type. For example, in "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A to E", the time reduction number is 99 times, and in "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", the time reduction number is 15 times. It should be noted that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the number of time reductions is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, as the small hit types, "16R normal small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A, B", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit" 99 times small hit A, B "is set. In these small hits, first, a small hit game is executed, and when a game ball passes through the V region 39 (V passage), a big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as a small hit game corresponds to the first R, and the big hit game that opens the first big winning opening 30 over 15R, which is executed after the V is passed, is performed. It corresponds to the 2nd to 16th R. If there is no V passage in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, "16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are small hits that can pass V. .. Whether or not V can pass during the small hit game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the above small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small hit game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, "16R normal small hit" (opening pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit". The opening time of "hit" and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type is that the opening timing of the second large winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening / closing member 71 that is moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening is changed. Because. Here, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after the opening for 0.01 seconds when the small hit game is started. In the opening pattern 22, since the second big winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hit game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small hit", it is practically impossible to pass V during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time, and both of them continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is won. The V opening / closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the mouth 35 is closed. Therefore, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", V passage during the small hit game becomes possible. ing.

"16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are big hits when the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. This is to control the game state after the game to the "time saving state and high base state" described later. "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" have the same number of time reductions in "time reduction state and high base state", respectively. different. For example, in "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", the time reduction number is 10 times, and in "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", the time reduction number is 15 times. On the other hand, the "16R normal small hit" is a hit that controls the game state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the big hit game when the big hit game is executed. However, since the "16R normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V, the big hit game is rarely executed.

In addition, all the small hits in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state are "16R normal small hits" in which V passage is practically impossible. On the other hand, the distribution rate of small hits in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is 50% for "16R time saving 5 times small hit", 25% for "16R time saving 10 times small hit", and "16R time saving 15 times small hit". "Is 12.5%," 16R time reduction 99 times small hit "is 12.5%, and" 16R normal small hit "is not included. Since the winning probability of the big hit does not change between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning either the "big hit" or the "small hit in which the big hit game (type 2 big hit game) is executed" is The special figure 2 lottery in the non-time saving state is higher than the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the game machine 1, the game ball is hit to the second start port 21 by hitting right in the time saving state, rather than hitting left in the non-time saving state and winning the game ball in the first starting port 20. It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the prize.

In the game machine 1, there are "win" and "miss" as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery (winning lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. If a hit is won, a "hit game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbol (type of hit) displayed as a stop. In this hit game (ordinary game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times in one round. The winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. .. There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long opening 1", "long opening 2", "short opening 1", and "short opening 2" are set as hit types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of game state The game control microcomputer 81 of the game machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for each of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". ". In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) is defined so that a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is often selected in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non-time saving state. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) is defined so that a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is often selected in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display.

Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 13). Even in the non-time saving state, if "long opening 1" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the opening pattern of the electric chew is "opening pattern 11", which is a long opening time of 5 seconds, but the winning type is "long". The probability of being distributed to "Open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, even if you win, the open time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds when winning, so that in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is substantially longer than in the non-time saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become. That is, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 in the time saving state. In the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is opened frequently, and the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol and the open time extension control for the electric chew 22 of the normal symbol display 42, the electric chew 22 is more than when the control is not executed. Should be easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, "15R time reduction 99 times big hit A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times big hit A, B", "15R time reduction 5 times big hit A to D", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", "16R time reduction The game state after the big hit game executed by winning "15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", or "16R time reduction 5 times small hit" is "time reduction state and high base state". .. In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times), or the jackpot is won. It ends when the jackpot game is executed. The game state after the big hit game executed by winning the "16R normal small hit" is the "non-time saving state and low base state". This gaming state is also called a "normal gaming state". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is this normal game state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as "time saving state", and the "non-time saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as "non-time saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 22 is easier to open than in the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the first gate 28, which is an opportunity for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. This is because the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, while passing the game ball through the second gate 29, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is left-handed to win the game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), when the "long opening 1" is won by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds, so that the second 2 Make a right-handed strike to get the game ball to the starting port 21. After closing the electric chew 22, left-handed again.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 can be used as a hit / fail determination means, a symbol control means, a hit game execution means, a game state control means, and a hit type selection means by reading a program stored in the main ROM 83. It works (see, for example, FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31, 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, the status, the counter, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (random number value per special symbol, type random number value per special symbol, reach random number value, etc.) shown in FIG. 8 (A). The variable pattern random number value, the random number value per ordinary symbol, and the random number value per ordinary symbol) are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 has a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V opening / closing member control process (step S106), and a V area. The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hold ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 has whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit value)". Is determined (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 has a value of a random number counter per ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: value of label-TRND-H) and a value of a type counter per ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: value of label-TRND-HS). ) Is acquired, and the acquired random number value group is stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “1 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls is “1” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step S208). ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 8). FIG. 8: Label-TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 8: Label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process described later (pre-determination buffer). Hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer and a reach random number value by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variable pattern random number counter are set. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process. Let me. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 preliminary determination process is the same as the special figure 2 preliminary determination process described above.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). When the stop display of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the stop display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). When the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the normal symbol is once in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18). The number of reserved balls in the above becomes "1", and then in step S505, the reserved balls are digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". In addition, the decrement of the number of normal symbol hold balls (digestion of the normal symbol hold) is executed together with the clear process for clearing the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol hold storage area 86. To.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13 (A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a random number value per ordinary symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold storage area 86. Is read. Then, the random value per normal symbol, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T5 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value per normal symbol is "0" to "254", it is determined as "hit", and when the random value per normal symbol is otherwise "255", it is "missing". (FIG. 13 (A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) with reference to the normal symbol per type determination table T6 (FIG. 13 (B)) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 Read the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using the normal symbol per type random value, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value of the type per normal symbol is "0" to "30", the hit type is determined to be "long open 1" and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 1". .. When the random value of the normal symbol hit type is "100" to "170", the hit type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 2". When the normal symbol hit type random value is other than that, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3" (FIG. 13 (B)). On the other hand, in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned collision determination, "missing symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13C) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using a game state (whether or not it is in a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. To do. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hit type is "long opening 1", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the time saving state, when the hit determination is "missing", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13 (C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation start and fluctuation time of the normal symbol (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information on the normal stop symbol data and information on the normal symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13 (C)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol as the normal symbol specified in step S507 (the normal symbol that hits or the normal symbol that is lost). (Figure Stop symbol) to stop (step S522). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and ends this process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs this process when the hit determination in the above (step S506) is "missing" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the game (normal game) opening, so that the normal symbol opening The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 22 by using the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 4", "open pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). .. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 2), or the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub control board 90 to notify the start of the ending of the game (normal game), so that the normal symbol ending The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is divided into five stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4", "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit detection, special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (type 2 special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (step S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (type 1 special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) of the second starting port 21 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Will be done. As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (special figure 1 reserved) is "0" in the game control microcomputer 81. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1408) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, when there is hold information in the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, the hold image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (the right of the four hold images 9A). The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) are shifted to the right by one. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to “2” (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1408) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold.

[Special symbol collision detection processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol collision determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the process flow of the hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the hit determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by using the reference special symbol hit determination table T1 and the read special symbol per random value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win / fail determination means".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the type random value per special symbol as the determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol per type random value and the special symbol per type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a “hit type selection means”. After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (big hit symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and turns it on. (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol per type random value as the determination value in the same manner as the jackpot type determination. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small hit type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small hit symbol) corresponding to the specified small hit type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process is terminated.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "missing" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and this process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the fluctuation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state jackpot table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). This is done (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state jackpot, the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation patterns are "P1" and "P2" Part, in Special Figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P14") is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) for the fluctuation pattern. Make a selection (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value, as in step S1603 described above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value. Here, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the portion where the variation pattern is "P3" in the special figure 1 and the portion where the variation pattern is "P15" in the special figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 in the non-time saving state reach. The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the non-time saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P4". , "P5", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P14"). In special figure 1, one of “P4” and “P5” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 in the non-time saving state reach. None The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for non-reach loss in the non-time saving state, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the non-reach loss in the non-time saving state (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P6". , "P7", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P15"). In the special figure 1, one of “P6” and “P7” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 1, since the fluctuation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in Special Figure 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be done. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1608 is that the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618 is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , Different from S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, The table for the time saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (the variation pattern is "P9" in the special figure 1 and the variation pattern is "P17" in the special figure 2). Part) is referred to. Further, for example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the time saving state (the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1 and the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 2). The part of "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: step S109). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). .. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "design control means". The stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. Here, regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of whether the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H to 33H), the opening pattern of the winning opening is "opening pattern 21". "Is set. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “15” is set in the round counter regardless of the jackpot type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), switches it to OFF (step S1805). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, the opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game).

In step S1802, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the type of the winning small hit (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9, as in step S1803 described above. Set the open pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small hit A" (the special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), the "opening pattern 22" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. Further, for example, when the small hit type is "16R time reduction 5 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "open pattern 23" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning small hit. Here, “16” is set in the round counter regardless of the small hit type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the V opening / closing member 71. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any of the small hit games, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF even if the time saving flag is ON. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small hit game is started (step S1814). After that, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "5", the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820), and ends this process. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process proceeds to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again, and the special symbol hit determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, when the time saving state is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 by one (step). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). The initial values set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later based on the setting table of FIG. 30. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 (step S2020).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 becomes "0" as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step). S2030). If neither the value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the value of the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When at least one value of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). As a result, the gaming state can be switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, and the like).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the big hit game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first jackpot 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning opening 30 (step S2203). .. The time (timing) for opening the first prize opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first large winning opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and the time for starting the opening again has been reached. If it is not the time (timing) to open the first large winning opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). When the type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the two-kind big hit game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game (small hit game and big hit game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. To do. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In this embodiment, the first large winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first large winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 by 1. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening in the round, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the first large winning opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first large winning opening 30 is satisfied. This is done (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the first large winning opening 30 is used. It means that one of the times when the closing time has been reached (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first large winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first big winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first big winning opening 30 (step S2211), and then this Finish the process.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) for opening the first large winning opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the first large winning opening 30. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first winning opening 30 between the round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first large winning opening 30 was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter becomes "0". Is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as the jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227). , The ending of the jackpot is started (step S2228). The ending command includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (FIG. 21). After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. This is done (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game state setting process (step S2234) described later, and finishes this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) after the big hit game, and in the case of the time saving state, the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving according to the hit type. This is a process of setting an initial value (number of time reductions) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "game state control means" by executing the above-mentioned game state management process (FIG. 27) and the game state setting process. In the game control microcomputer 81, first, the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "15R time saving 5 times big hit", "15R time saving 15 times big hit", "15R time saving 99 times big hit", "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit game executed by triggering "hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit") (step S2301). .. If the time saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is executed triggered by the normal hit (that is, "16R normal small hit"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, when the current jackpot game is executed with the time reduction hit as an opportunity (step S2301: YES), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 uses the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction. The set values shown in the setting table (FIG. 30) described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time is set to the "time saving state and high base state". This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, or that the next big hit (1 kind big hit or 2 kinds big hit) is won. It ends with the establishment of. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2, and the like).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described above. In FIG. 30, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with the trigger of "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot" or "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H"". , "15H", "25H", "37H"), "99" is set in each of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. Further, for example, when the big hit game executed this time is executed with "16R time reduction 10 times small hit" as an opportunity (when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is set in the first time reduction counter C1. It is set, and "15" is set in the second time reduction counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game: FIG. 28) and the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game). To do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern is completed in the small hit game being executed. When the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. When the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the second special winning opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404). .. The time (timing) for opening the second large winning opening 35 is when the opening time of the small hit has passed and the opening start time has been reached. The opening time of the small hit is 4 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the second prize opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. When it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second large winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2402 described above, when the second large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the second large winning opening 35 is satisfied. This is done (step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the second large winning opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 10), or that it is time to close the second large winning opening 35. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second special winning opening 35) is satisfied. When the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the second special winning opening 35, so that the large winning opening closing process is performed. This is done (step S2412). Here, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small hit game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, when the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). The “V flag” is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. .. When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the two-kind jackpot game, so the round counter is set to "0" (step S3432) and the special operation status is set to "1". (Step S2434), and this process is completed. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

In step S2430 described above, when the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and the jackpot flag is used to execute the two-kind jackpot game. Is switched to ON (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) in the next special operation process (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the two-kind jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the two types of jackpot games (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time is shifted to the two-kind big hit game.

[V opening / closing member control process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), the "V opening / closing member operation process" for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and in a predetermined period (timing). The "V validity period setting process" that considers the V passage of the game ball to be valid is performed (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game is started (FIGS. 26: steps S1812 and S1814). Therefore, the V opening / closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process are performed according to the small hit game. It will be done.

In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operating time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes. , The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off when the closing timing of the V opening / closing member 71 is reached. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, and then to a passing allowable state (open state) for 4 seconds. Then, it is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period in which the V flag is turned ON by regarding the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a as valid. The V valid period is from the start of opening the V region 39 (when the control of the V opening / closing member 71 is started to allow passage) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V region 39 (the time for controlling the V opening / closing member 71 to pass through) (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second). This is because the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is taken into consideration. In the V valid period setting process, a timer for measuring the V valid period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when it is time to enable the V area 39, and the V area 39 is set. When it is time to disable it, the V valid flag is turned off. In the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening / closing member operation processing and the V validity period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506). Specifically, the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation processing (step S2502). ) Has passed or not. When the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is not completed (step S2506: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "16R normal small hit" (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41. Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of "16R normal small hit", the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passing of the game ball during the small hit game. Is virtually impossible. On the other hand, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" (open pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 Is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, and both are continuously opened for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is won. The V opening / closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the mouth 35 is closed. Therefore, no matter what timing the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V region 39. Here, if the game ball is continuously fired by hitting right, the game ball will always win the second prize opening 35 during the opening period of the second prize opening 35. Each device such as the grand prize device 36 is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second special winning opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", right-handed during the small hit game. If the game ball is continuously fired, the game ball always passes through V.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V valid period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brush period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2602: YES). Step S2604), this process is completed. The "V passage command" is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passage.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 43. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94. As will be described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates by adding 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8 (B). When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the receive command analysis process (FIG. 37) or the like in the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the like. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, when the pre-determination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, when it is not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect end process” is a process for stopping the variable effect, and the details will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substituting the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process. If the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). When receiving (step S4505: YES), the normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510). The "normal symbol variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a normal symbol variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets the information on the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol variation start command and the information on the normal symbol variation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub RAM 94. To do. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the normal figure, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset normal symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and issues a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation effect in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, when the hit type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the "expected effect of V" (FIG. 44) described later. .. If the normal symbol variation start command is not received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it is received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end process is performed (step S4520). The "normal symbol variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command and sets the normal symbol variation effect end command for ending the normal symbol variation effect in the effect command set area 94b. .. If the normal symbol variation stop command is not received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). When receiving (step S4525: YES), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (content) to be executed at the time of a hit game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. The normal game effect selected here includes an opening effect executed during the opening and an open game effect executed during the opening of the electric chew 22. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol opening command and set at the time of winning determination of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the effect command of the sub RAM 94 is the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). When receiving (step S4535: YES), the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the winning game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and sets the information related to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined ending effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the first time saving counter and the second time saving) Each value of the counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V pass command, the RAM 94 holds the V pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, advance determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an “effect execution means” by executing the variable effect end process (step S4470) and the opening effect pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). The "mode status M" indicates the effect mode to be executed. The effect mode here is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, the images (characters, items, background images, etc. that appear) displayed on the image display device 7 are different, and the effect is variable. Is also executed in a mode according to the effect mode. Here, the mode status M is set to "1" and "2", "1" corresponds to the non-time saving state, and "2" corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is “1” or “2”.

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving effect scenario (step S5025). The "time saving effect scenario" is the time saving remaining number displayed on the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later, which is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game (hereinafter, "display time saving remaining number"). Shows the change scenario of. The time saving effect scenario is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. Here, the "remaining number of time reductions" is the remaining number of variations of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time reduction state after the jackpot game, and the number of fluctuation displays of the second special symbol that has already been executed in the time reduction state is It is the remaining number of times until the number of time reductions set according to the hit type is reached. The remaining number of time reductions corresponds to the value of the first time reduction counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the number of remaining time reductions reaches "0", the game state is switched from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (FIG. 27: steps S2030 and S2035). The game machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect of making the remaining number of display time reductions displayed on the image display device 7 different from or matching the actual remaining number of time reductions, based on the time reduction effect scenario. A specific embodiment will be described later. Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 described later and the time reduction effect scenario. When the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the reference to the time saving effect scenario.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variation effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variation effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires the variation effect pattern random value for effect determination. Then, from the variation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command, the variation effect pattern random value, the number of remaining display time reductions specified at the time reduction, and the special effect flag. Set the variable effect pattern corresponding to ON / OFF of. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time effect of crying" (FIG. 48) described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches it to OFF and executes "one-time effect of crying" as a variable effect. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state is the fluctuation, the "V card" described later "Shuffle production" (Fig. 44 (G)) is performed. When the mode status M is "2", the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) described later. Since the effect control microcomputer 91 performs this countdown effect, it functions as a "number display effect execution means".

The effect control microcomputer 91 is further stopped by referring to the contents of the so-called step-up advance notice effect, the chance-up advance notice effect, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 based on the variable effect pattern random value. The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this process. When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes a predetermined variation effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). When the mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the fluctuation of the second special symbol from the information about the fluctuation pattern set in the sub RAM 94. When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 by one. (Step S5120). The "first time saving effect counter JC1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side, and is used as the "first time saving counter C1" on the main control unit side. It corresponds. The "second time saving effect counter JC2" is the number of times the special symbol changes (the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes) executed during the time saving state on the sub-control unit side. It counts and corresponds to the "second time reduction counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 are determined by the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 becomes "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If neither the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 nor the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When at least one value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S5135). When the mode status M is switched to "1", the effect control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not there is a special figure 2 hold, and if there is a special figure 2 hold, sets a special effect flag. Switch to ON. As a result, if there is a special figure 2 hold when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48) described later is executed as the first variation effect in the non-time-saving state. .. In step S5130, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is determined from the information about the game state held in the sub RAM 94, and in the non-time saving state, the mode status M is set to "S5135". It may be configured to switch to "1". The information regarding the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when the game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). The "mode status setting process" is a process of determining the effect mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using the mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to for determining the mode status M according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the two-kind jackpot game after winning "16R normal small hit A", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". Is selected. Further, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot E", the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 33H, so that the mode status is M. "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is “1” (step S5510: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the process to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 (special figure stop symbol data). The set values corresponding to each are set (step S5515). The set value set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Further, the set value set in the second time saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table to shorten the first time. It is possible to specify the set value to be set in the effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2, respectively. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" is set in the first time saving effect counter JC1 and "15" is set in the second time saving effect counter JC2. After setting the set values in the time-saving effect counters JC1 and JC2, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the time-saving effect scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time saving effect scenario determination process" is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47). ) Is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time-saving effect scenario determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the time-saving effect scenario using the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 is a table referred to for determining the time-saving effect scenario according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data) and the time-saving effect scenario random value. The effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires a time-saving effect scenario random value. Then, the time saving effect scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the acquired random number value, and the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of the two-kind big hit game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data 25H), if the acquired time saving effect scenario random number value is "0 to 63" "Scenario B" is selected as the time saving effect scenario, and if the time saving effect scenario random value is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time saving effect scenario, and the time saving effect scenario random value is "96 to 127". If so, "Scenario D" is selected as the time-saving production scenario. Further, for example, in the case of the ending of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D" (special figure stop symbol data 31H), the time saving effect scenario is as a time saving effect scenario regardless of the acquired time saving effect scenario random value. "Scenario H" is selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time saving effect scenario. FIG. 43 shows the time saving displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game in each time saving effect scenario (scenarios A to H). The correspondence between the remaining number of times (display time reduction remaining number of times) and the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in "Scenario A", the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "Scenario B", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "96". The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 decreases. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "2". Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "95", the display time reduction remaining number is set to "1" and a display suggesting that the display time reduction remaining number is increased by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "94" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "Scenario E", when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the number of remaining display time reductions, and then the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "12". The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 decreases. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from "15" to "12", the number of remaining display time reductions changes from "5" to "2". Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "11", the display time reduction remaining number is set to "1", and a display suggesting that the display time reduction remaining number is increased by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "10" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the number of remaining display time reductions. In this way, by making the number of remaining display time reductions different from the actual number of remaining time reductions, that is, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1, the player is expected that the number of remaining display time reductions may increase in the middle. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending effect pattern (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94 so that the ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this process.

8. Production example of this embodiment [Expected production of V (when a normal symbol is won in a non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected effect of V. This expected effect of V is when the normal symbol is won and the hit type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" (see FIG. 13) while the special figure 1 is changing or stopped in the non-time saving state. Is executed. The expected effect of V is an effect that suggests whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened for a long time, and further suggests the result of the hit / fail judgment of special figure 2 when the game ball enters the electric chew 22. is there.

The expected effect of V is during the variable effect of special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 44 (A) using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when left-handed in a non-time saving state (here, a decorative pattern is used). It is executed when the game ball passes through the second gate 29 while the player is in the reach state) and is elected with a normal symbol and the hit type is selected as "long opening 1" or "short opening 1". That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and is included in this command in the normal symbol variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4510). It is determined that the hit type is "long open 1" or "short open 1" from the information about the normal stop symbol data, and the variation pattern corresponding to the expected effect of V is selected to execute the command. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of the special figure 1 is displayed until then. Using the region that has been performed, the expected cut-in effect of V that displays the image GA1 suggesting that the expected effect of V is started is executed. The display area HR1 is provided in one corner of the display screen 7a. In the effect of the display area HR1, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation start process (FIG. 37: step S4460), the variation effect start command (FIG. 38: Step S5020) is set to execute the command.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a V-level challenge effect that displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 that indicates an indicator capable of expressing an increase in points is executed. .. In this V level challenge effect, the player can increase the point of the indicator of the image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63 to increase the V level. In this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is "Short opening 1", the indicator is displayed as shown in FIG. V that lowers the point and displays the image GA4 that suggests that the V level is down and the V level could not reach a certain level, and the image GA5 that the V level is down and suggests that the jackpot cannot be expected this time. Perform a level-down effect. In this V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

On the other hand, when the hit type of the normal symbol is "long opening 1", then, with the long opening of the electric chew 22 for 5 seconds (FIG. 14), as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the indicator Image GA6 that raises the point and suggests that the V level has increased and the V level has reached a certain level, and suggests that the V level has increased and the next stage can be expected to have a big hit. A V level up effect for displaying the image GA7 is executed. In this V level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the image GA8 for urging the player to hit the right side for entering the game ball into the electric chew 22 for the transition to the next stage is displayed on the right. Perform a hitting suggestion effect. In this right-handed suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the variable effect of the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1. This right-handed suggestion effect is executed until the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 displayed in the display area HR1 is completed. This right-handed suggestion effect is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91.

If no ball has entered the electric chew 22, the V level down effect shown in FIG. 44 (D) described above is executed after the right-handed suggestion effect. This V level down effect is executed based on the normal symbol ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91. On the other hand, when one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed suggestion effect, as a variable effect of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), the back side in which the V card and the lost card are mixed A V-card shuffle effect that displays the image GA9 that shuffles the facing card is executed. In this case, the display area HR2 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 when the second start port 21 is won.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V card shuffle effect, then, as shown in FIG. 44 (H), the three shuffled by the V card shuffle effect. One of the cards is selected and turned over, and a V card selection effect for displaying an image GA10 indicating that the turned card is a V card is executed. In the display area HR2, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), the expected success effect of V that displays the image GA11 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GA12 prompting right-handed is executed. This expected success production of V suggests that the expected production of V is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. The expected success effect of V is started in the display area HR2 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the expected success effect of V is started, and after the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the expected success effect of V is started. It is configured so that the timing (time) until the time is equal to. "Equal" here does not mean an exact match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the player feels that they are equal. As an error, for example, about ± 2 seconds can be exemplified. In the case of a small hit, after the expected success production of this V, the small hit game is executed, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two types of big hits are made, and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed even though the V has not passed (FIG. 44). (I)) is started. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V card shuffle effect, then one of the three cards shuffled by the V card shuffle effect as shown in FIG. A lost card selection effect is executed in which a card is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 indicating that the flipped card is a lost card is displayed. In the display area HR2, a reach state using a decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (K), the expected failure effect of V displaying the image GA14 suggesting that the expected effect of V is a failure, and the big hit game is not executed due to a loss without a big hit or a small hit. To execute. In this case, in the display area HR2, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold of special figure 2, after the expected failure effect of V, the process shifts to the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44 (G)) again. If there is no hold of special figure 2, the production shifts to the normal special figure 1.

The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (H), and (I) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern "P13" (FIG. 12) is selected. The variation effect of FIG. 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (J), and (K) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern “P14” (FIG. 12) is selected.

Further, a V level challenge effect (FIG. 44 (C)), a V level down effect (FIG. 44 (D)), a V level up effect (FIG. 44 (E)), and a right-handed suggestion effect (FIG. 44 (F)). In), the variation effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44 (A) is shown in the display area HR1, but there is a hold of the special figure 1 even when the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed. In that case, the variation effect corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

Further, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted. Further, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and 50 described later, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is also omitted.

[Hit game production]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when the special figure 2 lottery is won. This winning game effect is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of Special Figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command of the big hit game or the small hit game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4480). , When it is determined from the information about the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that it is a big hit or a small hit of special figure 2, it is executed by setting the corresponding opening effect start command. This hit game effect: FIG. 45 (A) shows, for example, an effect suggesting that a big hit game is executed (V expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette success effect: FIG. 46 (C), target. Successful guessing effect: It is executed after FIG. 48 (C).

First, at the start of the big hit game associated with the type 1 big hit, or at the start of the small hit game associated with the small hit, as shown in FIG. The suggestion image GB1 and the right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image GB3 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed using a predetermined character or the like and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are continued in the type 1 jackpot game from the start of the jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as “first game period”) elapses. Further, in the small hit game, it is continued from the start of the small hit game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the type 1 big hit game and the small hit game, the same content (similar) is produced during the first game period. In this first game period, at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small hit game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (here, 1.6). It is a time equal to or longer than the total time (1.61 seconds) with (seconds). Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (1.6 seconds)). + Ending time (3 seconds)) of 4.61 seconds is set. When the first game period has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game associated with the first-class jackpot, or when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game and the second-class jackpot by passing V is confirmed. As shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that the jackpot game is in progress and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when two types of big hits are made after the small hit game, the effects of FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same manner as when one type of big hit is made.

On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game accompanying the small hit and the non-execution of the big hit game is confirmed by non-passage of V, FIG. 45 (D) is shown instead of the image GB4. As shown, the image GB5 suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is displayed.

In the hit game production in the present embodiment, the production during the type 1 big hit game, the small hit game accompanying the small hit, and the production during the type 2 big hit game are the same (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (Fig. 45)). C)) is configured to be. In other words, the effect from the start of the 1st type jackpot game to the end of the big hit game and the effect from the start of the small hit game to the end of the 2nd type big hit game are configured to be the same effect. Even if the two types of big hits are not executed after the small hits associated with the small hits, at least during the small hits game, the same effect as in the case of the one type big hits (FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B)). ) Is performed, and after the lapse of the first game period, a different effect (FIG. 45 (D)) than in the case of the type 1 jackpot is performed. The "similar (same) production" here means that the content should be close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big hit and small hit productions, and the productions do not have to be exactly the same. .. For example, when some characters are different, when a part of a predetermined character's mode (for example, clothes, clothes color, equipment) is different, or when the appearance timing of a predetermined character is slightly different. Naturally, it is included in the same production. Further, in the hit game production in the present embodiment, when two types of big hits are obtained after the small hit game, the big hit game production (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) is started based on the fact that the V is passed by the small hit game. It is configured to start the big hit game effect at the start of the small hit game (that is, based on the final display of the small hit symbol). In other words, in the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, an effect suggesting a small hit game (for example, an effect instructing the player to aim at V) is not performed during the small hit game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the small hit game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) is started. ) And the timing (time) from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the jackpot game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) is started are configured to be equal to each other. .. As is clear from the above, the series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed (expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I) → FIG. 45 (A) → FIG. 45 (B)) is small. In the case of a hit and the case of a type 1 jackpot, the same content (similar effect) is obtained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period from the start of the expected success effect of V to the end of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit. For example, when the expected success production time of V is 5 seconds and the small hit game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. In addition, a series of effects suggesting that the jackpot game is executed are as follows: V roulette success effect: FIG. 46 (C), targeting success effect: FIG. 48, instead of V's expected success effect: FIG. 44 (I). (C)) may be used. Here, the V roulette success production time and the target success production time are both 5 seconds.

[Special figure 2 Fluctuation effect at the time of lottery (when the time is shortened)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation effect at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. This variation effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery is executed at the time of the small hit of the special figure 2, the big hit of the special figure 2, or the loss of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), this command is used. When it is determined from the information about the included fluctuation pattern that the fluctuation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (FIG. 12), it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step). S5020).

In the variation effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), the V roulette effect for displaying the image GC1 showing how the roulette having the loss zone and the V zone rotates is executed. In this case, the display area HR3 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variable state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the roulette that was rotating in the V roulette effect stops. The V zone selection effect for displaying the image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone is executed. In the display area HR3, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), a V roulette success effect that displays the image GC3 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GC4 is executed. This V roulette success production suggests that the V roulette production is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 type jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is high. It is a suggestive production. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this V roulette success effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement in the display area HR2. To be started. That is, the timing (time) from the confirmation display of the small hit symbol on the special symbol display 41 to the start of the V roulette success effect, and the period from the confirmation display of the big hit symbol to the start of the V roulette success effect. It is configured so that the timing (time) of is equal to. In the case of a small hit, after this V roulette success production, a small hit game is executed, and when the player passes V by hitting the right side, two types of big hits are made and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (two types of big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the player has passed V (FIG. 46). (C)) is started. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 46 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), the roulette that was rotating in the V roulette effect stops, and the stop zone becomes the loss zone. The loss zone selection effect for displaying the image GC5 indicating that the image is GC5 is executed. In the display area HR3, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the V roulette failure effect for displaying the image GC6 indicating that the V roulette effect is a failure and the jackpot game is not executed due to a loss is executed. In the display area HR3, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If there is a hold in FIG. 2, after the V roulette failure effect, the process shifts to the V roulette effect (see FIG. 46 (A)) again.

In the time saving state, the hit / fail judgment is made in Special Figure 1 and a big hit (Fig. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P8" is selected) or a small hit (Fig. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P9" is selected). In the same manner as in the case of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2, the effects of FIGS. Further, in the case of a loss (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P10” is selected) in the case of the loss in the special figure 1, the same as in the case of the loss in the special figure 2, FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (D). , (E) is executed. Further, in the time saving state, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is lost (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P19" is selected), or when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is lost (FIG. 12: fluctuation pattern). (When "P11" is selected), a variable effect for quickly notifying the loss is executed using the decorative pattern.

[Countdown effect (when the time is shortened)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the countdown effect. This countdown effect is an effect of displaying an image of the number of remaining time reductions on the display screen 7a during each variation effect during the time reduction state. The countdown effect is shortened after the jackpot game and starts from the first change of the special symbol. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M Is "2", it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020). The "remaining number of times of time saving of the countdown effect" indicated by the image is determined with reference to the time saving effect scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time saving effect scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "display time saving remaining number" indicated by the time saving remaining number image is the same number of times as the actual time saving remaining number (actual remaining time saving number of times) until the time saving state ends, or the number of times less than the actual time saving remaining number. Is shown as a pseudo time saving remaining number. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of the effect corresponding to “Scenario C”.

In the countdown effect based on the "scenario C", first, the countdown effect A is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (A). In this countdown effect A, in the first fluctuation after the time reduction state is set, the time reduction remaining number image GDA with the "display time reduction remaining number" set to 5 is displayed, and the second to fifth fluctuations are the previous fluctuations. The displayed time-saving remaining number image GDA representing the number of times obtained by subtracting one from the displayed time-saving remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect A, the time-saving remaining number image GDA with the "display time-saving remaining number" set to 4 times is displayed for the second variation, and the "display time-saving remaining number" is set to 1 for the fifth variation. Time saving Remaining number of times Display the image GDA.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, the charge effect A is then executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation, as shown in FIG. 47 (B). In this charge effect A, a charge image CHA suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) about 10 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect A, the charge amount (10 times) is subtracted by one from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous variation (fifth variation). The number of times (10 times) increased by the number of times (10 times) is set as the "display time reduction remaining number". The time saving remaining number image GDB is displayed, and the 7th to 15th fluctuations are one from the remaining number shown in the previous fluctuation. The time saving remaining number image GDB showing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect B, the time saving remaining number image GDB with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 10 is displayed at the 6th variation, and the time saving remaining number with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 9 times at the 7th variation. The remaining number of times image GDB is displayed, and at the 15th variation, the time saving remaining number of times image GDB with the "display time saving remaining number of times" as one is displayed.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown effect B is completed, the charge effect B is then executed during the variation effect of the 15th variation, as shown in FIG. 47 (D). In this charge effect B, a charge image CHB suggesting that the "display time reduction remaining number" is charged (increased) by about 84 times is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, in the 16th variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect B, the charge amount (84 times) is subtracted by 1 from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous variation (15th variation). The number of times (84 times) increased by the number of times (84 times) is set as the "display time reduction remaining number". The time saving remaining number image GDC is displayed, and the 17th to 99th fluctuations are one from the remaining number shown in the previous fluctuation. The time-saving remaining number image GDC showing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, the time saving remaining number image GDC with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 84 is displayed at the 16th variation, and the time saving remaining number with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 83 times at the 17th variation. The remaining number of times The image GDC is displayed.

The countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variation effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variation effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each variation effect. Further, during each variation effect, the image of the remaining number of times of time reduction may be continuously displayed.

[One-time crying effect (1st variation after the end of the time saving state (Special Figure 2))]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time effect of crying. This one-time effect of crying is a variation effect executed in the next variation of the variation when the hold of the special figure 2 is held in the last variation of the time saving state, that is, the first effect after the time saving state. It is a fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the special effect flag When is ON, it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).

In the one-time production of crying, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the image GE1 showing how the "target" consisting of the hit zone and the loss zone is rotating, and the state advantageous to the player are the last. The targeting start effect of displaying the image GE2 indicating that the image is GE2 is executed. In this case, the display area HR4 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variable state of the decorative symbol.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the arrow hits the hit zone after the hit start effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B). A hit effect for displaying the image GE3 indicating that is executed. In the display area HR4, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the doublet symbol arrangement suggesting a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the image GE4 suggesting that the jackpot game is executed and the right-handed suggestion image GE5 prompting right-handed are displayed, and the target is successful and the jackpot ( A successful targeting effect is performed, which suggests that the expectation of the 1st type jackpot or the 2nd type jackpot is high, in other words, the high expectation that the jackpot game is executed. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this target success effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the doublet symbol arrangement in the display area HR2. To be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the successful targeting effect is started, and from when the large hit symbol is confirmed and when the successful targeting effect is started. It is configured so that the timing (time) of is equal to. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after this successful hitting effect, and when the player passes V by right-handed hit, two types of big hits are made, and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the fluctuation effect is stopped, and the effect suggesting that the big hit (type 2 big hit) game is executed regardless of whether or not the player has passed V (FIG. 48). (C)) is started. Then, during the small hit game, the effect suggesting the small hit game and the effect suggesting the passage of V are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can make him think that he has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect is stopped, the same effect (FIG. 48 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Even if the numbers of doublets that are stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / miss judgment in Special Figure 2 is a loss, after the targeting start effect, then, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the image GE6 showing that the arrow hits the target loss zone. Perform a target loss effect to display. In the display area HR4, the reach state using the decorative pattern is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the target hit failure effect of displaying the image GE7 suggesting that the target hit is a failure, the hit is lost without a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit game is not executed is executed. .. In the display area HR4, a symbol arrangement suggesting a loss is shown using a decorative symbol.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (C) in the one-time effect of crying, when the variation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first variation in the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In the first variation of the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A), (D), and (E) is the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12). ) Is an example of the effect executed when is selected.

9. Operation of the board movable body The operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like, or the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. Display / light emission control is performed such that the 15 is made to emit light in a specific mode.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advance direction (movement in the advance direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable accessory 14. 53 and 54 are explanatory views illustrating the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 49, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 50, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united to form one decorative member (combination accessory) (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms the contour of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united accessory is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed, there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. That is, a combination effect of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a human face) by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined character as an image on the display screen 7a. Can be executed. The target completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to the human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed by the combined accessory, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advanced position of FIGS. 50 and 51 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state of FIG. 49, and stands still there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, the combined accessory can rotate vertically in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the united accessory can be rotated around an axis parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a as a rotation axis, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the united accessory gradually becomes an elliptical shape narrow in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the human face to be displayed is deformed according to the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. Thereby, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can be used to produce an effect as if a human face is bowing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be capable of emitting light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united accessory (decorative member), and each of them can be switched on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14R can emit light in conjunction with (corresponding to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the right movable accessory 14R and the left movable accessory 14L can be interlocked with each other to emit light.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotationally movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 55 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, the decorative portion can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise (rotated clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can both perform the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapped and combined state. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are first in a state where the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. A second combination effect in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are tilted at a predetermined angle can be performed. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and each of them moves to the advance position in a tilted state and overlaps. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. This variation timing change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. 15 is driven.

[Fluctuating timing change production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variation timing change effect A. In the variation timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position, which is the third from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical reserved icon 9C with a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to change at the same time and are stopped at the same time. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the hold icon 9A of the black sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 59 (D), at the same time when the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not displayed at the same time, but the timing of the stop display is shifted. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) with each change. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical reserved icon 9C having a relatively medium hit expectation, the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to fluctuate at the same time. , The stop display is not simultaneous, but the timing is off. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts the variable display. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change before the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, but the opposite may be true. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) with each change. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped hold icon 9C with a relatively high expectation of winning, the fluctuation start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display are displayed. The timings are different. After FIG. 59 (J), the hold icon 9A of the white sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Variation timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the variation timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, three sets of decorative symbols are variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes 8 ml of the left decorative symbol, 8 mc of the middle decorative symbol, and 8 mr of the right decorative symbol, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position, which is the third from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the variation in which the hold icon of the white sphere is in the hold display position, the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, three decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. To. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical reserved icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change at the same time. At the same time, the stop display is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the hold icon 9A of the black sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the stop display is maintained for the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol). As shown in FIG. 60 (D), at the same time when the hold icon 9A of the black sphere reaches the hold display position, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are in a state where the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8m continue to be variablely displayed. Is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8 ml, 8 mc, 8 mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a hold icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the three decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is the stop of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) with each change. Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative symbols stops may be different. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C, which is a black spherical icon with a relatively medium hit expectation, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed. While the fluctuation starts, the timing of the stop display is not all at the same time, but at least in part. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and the variable display starts before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative symbol starts the variable display. In the present embodiment, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start to change before the first decorative symbol, but they may be opposite. Also, which one starts the fluctuation first may change (may be random) for each fluctuation. Further, the timing at which the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate may be different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue the variable display. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol), but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change (may be random) for each change. Further, the timing at which each of the three decorative symbols stops may be different. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped reserved icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol). In, the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), at the same time that the hold icon of the white sphere reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed. Start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8m are stopped and displayed at the same time. To. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

[Fluctuating timing change production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) of the variation timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60 (F) and 60 (G) of the variation timing change effect B. That is, FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (E) are executed before FIG. 61 (A) of the fluctuation timing change effect C. In FIG. 61A, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed, and then the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8r are stopped and displayed at the same time. .. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes 8 ml of the left decorative symbol, 8 mc of the middle decorative symbol, and 8 mr of the right decorative symbol, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, the effect that the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears) is executed. Two hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, which is the second from the right (here, the leftmost). The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, of the three hold icons 9A, the star-shaped hold icon, the black spherical hold icon, and the white spherical hold icon, the star-shaped hold icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical hold icon is 2. The second highest hit expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61B, the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol) start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbol. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start moving and the variable display starts before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position reaches the hold display position. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward, stands still in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative symbol disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo-continuous production starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit "555". The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same hit as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), 60 (D) to (H), and 61 (D) to (H), the first decorative symbol is After the stop display, the second decorative symbol stops and displays the first effect, and after the first effect, the first decorative symbol does not start the next variable display, and the second decorative symbol is next. It is possible to execute the second effect of starting the variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the second effect, the hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the second decorative symbol before it arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement. The corresponding fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first 3 The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (H) to (J), (A), 61 (H) to (J), and (A), after the first effect, the second It is possible to execute the third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the effect of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the hold icon is a star as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), 60 (D) to (H), and 61 (D) to (H). , After the first effect, the second effect is performed, and when the hold icon is a white sphere, the third effect is performed after the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variation timing change effect.
[Modification 1]
The first variation of FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the second variation of FIGS. 59 (C) to (F), and the third variation of FIGS. 59 (G) to (J) are executed in any order. May be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Also, the same type of variation may be performed repeatedly. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of the hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. As long as the first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are symbols displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the symbols are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative symbol 2l, the second decorative symbol 8L, and the third decorative symbol 8ml are not limited to the above in the mode of variable display indicating that they are changing. For example, the variable display may be in a mode that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in a mode in which the numbers move at a high speed and the numbers cannot be discriminated, or the numbers may move at a discriminating speed. Moreover, the fluctuation speed may change in the middle.

[Modification example 4]
The first decorative symbol is supposed to start changing when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be immediately before or after that. Immediately before and after here is, for example, a range of a few seconds before and after.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
After the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first effect that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the second effect, the variation corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative symbol before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A1-1 or the aspect A1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
In the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4, which is subordinate to aspect A1-2.
When the hold icon is the first aspect, the second effect is performed after the first effect.
When the hold icon is the second aspect, the third effect is performed after the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The symbol direction change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This symbol direction change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. 15 is driven.

[Design direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the right. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. .. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state in which the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C), but is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Is stopped and displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state of being tilted to the same extent as the tilt of the number when it fluctuates. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done. With the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the numbers at the time of fluctuation. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, but may be images having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA and the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), an effect is performed in which a specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Will be done. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at the first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. The orientation (posture) of this specific image CHA is also tilted in the same manner as the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the specific number (left decorative symbol 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stop is displayed. The third position is located on the lower side in the vertical direction from the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol 8C is changing, but not in a visible state. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the same variable direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state of being tilted to the same extent as the tilt of the number when it fluctuates. Each number is tilted in the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the positional relationship with each other. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and the orientation is along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the specific number (right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the stop display is displayed at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes visible. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the vicinity of the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable direction different from the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves in a state in which the direction (posture) of the number is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of fluctuation, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative symbol 8C), but is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the design direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the left decorative symbol is oriented along the first direction and is oriented along the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right). After the first effect and the first effect, which are variably displayed in the direction), as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E), the left decorative symbol is in a second direction different from the first direction (direction). For example, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the stop display is displayed in the direction along the vertical direction). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, the diagonally right direction). Later, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the direction is along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction) while moving toward the second position located above the first position in the vertical direction. After reaching the second position, the third position is located below the second position in the vertical direction while maintaining the orientation along the second direction as shown in FIG. 62 (D). Move towards position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (C), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. At that time, a part of the specific image CHA becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), after the second effect, the right decorative symbol is newly moved to the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right) from the state where it is not displayed. After the third effect, which is variablely displayed in the direction along the first direction, and as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the right decorative symbol is along the second direction. It is possible to execute the fourth effect, which is stopped and displayed in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), after the fourth effect, the intermediate decorative symbol is oriented in a third direction (for example, a vertical direction) different from the first direction. It is possible to execute the fifth effect which is variablely displayed in the direction along the third direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. The direction is along. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the design direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L bounces and follows the vertical direction after the variation is displayed, but if the direction is different from the variation direction, the left decorative symbol 8L may be in a direction other than the vertical direction. Good. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L may be tilted to the left side to be stopped and displayed, or may be tilted sideways to be stopped and displayed after bouncing. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by changing its direction without bouncing after the variable display.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C, the fluctuation of the right decorative symbol may be visible (variation display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol is stopped, or after the left decorative symbol is stopped. Fluctuations may be visible (variation display is displayed). The same applies to the decorative design.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set to the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the change direction and the stop mode of the intermediate decorative symbol may be set to the symbol direction change effect C.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the direction along the first direction in the direction along the first direction, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
In the second effect, after the first decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative symbol is located on one side in the vertical direction from the first position. While moving toward the position, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the direction is maintained along the second direction and is more vertical than the second position. Move towards a third position located on the other side of the direction,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A2-1 or the aspect A2-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
In the second effect, when the first decorative symbol reaches the first position and then moves toward the second position, a part of the first decorative symbol becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the second effect, the second decorative symbol is newly displayed in a direction along the first direction from an undisplayed state in a direction along the first direction. And the production of
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the direction along the second direction can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative symbol that constitutes a set of decorative symbols that can notify whether or not the image is hit, together with the first decorative symbol.
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol is varied and displayed in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction. Is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display means.
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory symbol cooperation effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation effect, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable combination Drive the object 15.

[Character design cooperation production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect A. The character symbol cooperation effect A is one of the variation pattern effects including the pseudo continuous effect, and FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (J) are executed with one variation. In the accessory symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the upper retracted position (FIG. 1) of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to form a part of the display screen 7a. It stands still at the advance position in front of it. The shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform) as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. That is, you can notice that the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. You can make an impression and improve your interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo-continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (G) is executed. The pseudo-ream continuation suggestion effect is the same as the pseudo-ream start suggestion effect described above. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position. The shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform) with the movement to the advance position. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in shape in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. The mode of the modification may be different from the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect B. The character symbol cooperation production B is one of the fluctuation pattern productions including the pseudo continuous production, and FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) are the previous one fluctuations, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) are. It is the next one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 66A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous fixed stop display roll "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It stands still at the front advance position that covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change (deform) in shape as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. To do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of the same characters (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variablely displayed. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. It is possible to impress that and improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including the temporary stop display). After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Character design cooperation production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation effect C. The character symbol cooperation effect C is one of the variation pattern effects including the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J) are. It is the next one variation including the pseudo-continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop display). At this time, at the same time, the effect that the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start variable display. The stop display is maintained for the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving, and the variable display starts before reaching the hold display position.

Next, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, first, in the state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue the variable display, the first decoration that continues to stop at the previous fixed stop display roll "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears temporarily, and instead, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display of "I'm going !!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. A part of the screen 7a is covered, and a rotation operation is executed at that position. As a result, the shapes of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again after the pseudo-continuous start suggestion display are changed as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates. (Deform. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are cracked in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15, and the shape is gradually crushed. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, and are distorted and deformed so as to be cracked. In the player, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, distorted, and cracked. You can notice that it is executed, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, one large character (that is, "OARO") similar to the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. .. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) displayed in the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, neither the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that it is a special production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the variable display of both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue the variable display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (including a temporary stop display). ), And then, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the variable display again. That is, the pseudo-continuous production is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the first effect. After the production of 1, the second production in which the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advancing position that covers a part of the display screen 7a. Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), in the second effect, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are distorted as the second movable accessory 15 moves. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the second movable accessory 15 has a decorative portion represented by “OARO”, and is shown in FIG. 65 (H). As shown, after the second effect, a third effect in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and 67 (C) to (J), the first effect and the second effect are during one variation. It is executed, and in the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the first effect is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) and 67 (G) to (J), a pseudo continuous effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) and 67 (C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the character symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the character symbol cooperation effect A, it is assumed that FIGS. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one variation. However, FIGS. 65 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 65 (C) to (J) may have different variations. Further, in the character symbol cooperation effects B and C, FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) are changed by one, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67. It is assumed that (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative symbols illustrated in the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C are examples thereof, and are not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative symbol when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to the distorted mode. For example, the decorative design may collapse and fall apart, or may have the same shape and be smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the accessory symbol cooperation production A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from the variable display during fluctuation, or may not be continuously displayed as variable. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the character symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the effect of FIG. 67 (E) of the character symbol cooperation effect C may be performed. Further, for example, in the pseudo-continuous production of FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) of the character symbol cooperation effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect of the character symbol cooperation effect A may be executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a movable accessory that can be moved in front of the display means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect that the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and
After the first effect, it is possible to carry out a second effect in which the shape of the decorative symbol changes as the movable accessory moves to the advance position that covers a part of the display means. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted with the movement of the movable accessory.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
A game machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
The movable accessory has a decorative portion on which a specific object is represented.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific object is displayed on the display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3.
After the third effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one variation.
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the first effect is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative symbol different from the decorative symbol.
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
A game machine characterized by that.

The specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory Drive the object 15.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display) at "123" of the deviation. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

After that, the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by the frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and FIG. 68 As shown in (E), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. Due to the reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (G), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R after the variable display are displayed as "789". Stop display (including temporary stop display) is displayed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 69 (C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (C) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by the frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward on the display screen 7a. To do. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and the specific image As shown in FIG. 68 (E) of the symbol cooperation effect A, both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and an effect of repeating the mode displayed on the front side thereof is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), due to the reciprocating movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 68 (F) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and an effect of repeating the mode displayed on the back side thereof is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player gradually becomes difficult to see the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. You can notice that, that is, the pseudo-ream is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been confirmed, and here, the characters "I did it!" Are displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHBs are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the jackpot. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front surface of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is further displayed on the front surface of the specific image CHA. In this way, by overlapping a plurality of a plurality of images, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Move back and forth. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the stop display are arranged along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As shown in FIG. 69 (G), the specific image CHA overlaps both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L by the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof and FIG. 69 As shown in (B), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69 (H), due to the reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), both the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped with each other, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA, the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the image is gradually thinned. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player can notice that the jackpot game is started after that, since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the jackpot displayed as stopped gradually become difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the right-handed image MGU is displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image symbol cooperation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. At the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. The specific image CHA is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA is newly displayed from above the display screen 7a by frame-in, and moves to a position overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variablely displayed. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction in a state of overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, anything that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the one that is moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. This means that the images are displayed without being chipped in the overlapping portion of the two images. On the contrary, when two images are displayed overlapping, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and the image is missing and displayed in the overlapping part of the two images. , The image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. On the other hand, the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "1"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers start to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a visible state. .. On the other hand, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving numerical images constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It also overlaps with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numerical image constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Further, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the outlier "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA is changed is executed. Here, as one of the change effects, an effect of increasing the specific image CHA is performed, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image CHA, the content of the image may be changed to a different content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. By this change effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the wrong eye will change again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a plurality of specific image CHAs is displayed. Here, as one of the pluralization effects, an effect in which one new specific image CHA is additionally displayed is performed, but the mode of the pluralization is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific image CHAs may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added is continuously reciprocating on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA reciprocates on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. With this pluralization effect, it is possible to further raise the expectation that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the wrong eye will change again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the effect of frame-out of the two specific image CHAs is performed. Here, one of the two specific image CHAs moves upwards, the other moves downwards, and is framed out at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), a pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM suggesting that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started (start of pseudo-ream) is displayed. Here, in the pseudo-ream suggestion image NKM, the characters "second time !!" indicating the number of pseudo-reams are represented. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), when the pseudo-continuous suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image symbol cooperation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (E), the first effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the drawing. As shown in 68 (F) to (G), after the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to 68 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect and the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that can notify whether or not they are hit. A symbol image is included, and in the first effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. As shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping the other one or more of the symbol images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , The specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), in the first effect, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image CHA is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (D), the specific image CHA includes an effect of being newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to see due to fading out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific image symbol cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to overlap at the same time as the two symbol images. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap with only one symbol image, or may overlap with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may be arcuate or meandering. Further, it may move left and right while swinging in the vertical direction. Further, it may be stopped in the middle.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set to specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from the variable display during fluctuation, or may not be continuously displayed as variable. Here, the variable display means a state in which the variable mode is visually displayed.

[Modification example 4]
The contents of the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (I), FIGS. 70 (A) to (J) may be executed. Further, for example, after FIGS. 70 (A) to (J), FIGS. 69 (D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
The first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-2.
The decorative symbol includes a plurality of symbol images capable of notifying whether or not it is a hit.
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed so as to overlap one or more of the plurality of symbol images, and then displayed so as to overlap the other one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-3.
In the first effect, the symbol images are stopped and displayed side by side in the first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
The first effect includes an effect in which the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol by frame-in after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image is not displayed. Yes,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5.
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see due to fading out.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative pattern mode change effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern mode change production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect A. In the decorative symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (decorative symbol variation effect) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed becomes slow. It is displayed variable while. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "9" is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" is slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9" from the aspect of the image of the number "9". It changes to the above mode. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed fluctuating while. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further slowed down, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the aspect of the image of the number "5". It changes to the above mode. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes further slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) becomes the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3" from the aspect of the image of the number "3". It changes to the above mode. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Decorative pattern mode change production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect B. In the decorative symbol mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving diagonally upward to the left from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. .. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated laterally at the stop display position, and then the mode of the image of the number “9” is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" is slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9" from the aspect of the image of the number "9". It changes to the above mode. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a diagonally downward to the left while the moving speed becomes slower. .. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is further slowed down, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. The rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the aspect of the image of the number "5". It changes to the above mode. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes further slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) becomes the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be once or may be a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated laterally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number "3" is changed. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3" from the aspect of the image of the number "3". It changes to the above mode. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Decorative pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect C. In the decorative symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not disappear once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to bend to the right from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed becomes slow. It is displayed variable while. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the number "9" in this embodiment) is the left decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from blue to red. The color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the mode of the image of the red number "9" is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative symbol 8L, from the aspect of the image of the red number "9", the image of the red number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "9". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. It is displayed fluctuating while. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the number "5" in the present embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), in the right decorative symbol 8R, the mode of the image of the red number “5” is changed. Specifically, in the right decorative symbol 8R, from the aspect of the image of the red number "5", the image of the red number "5" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "5". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), an effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not change with movement. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it is moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), the moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes further slower, and one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C (the image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) is the intermediate decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "3" of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. The color of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C may be any number of colors, and the color may change from any number of colors to any number of colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), the mode of the image of the red number "3" is changed in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the image of the red number "3" becomes slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "3" is obtained from the aspect of the image of the red number "3". The image of the character is attached to the character. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbols 8C other than the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop display position disappear. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as a lost mode (missed symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a or may be different.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed in the first aspect (for example, numbers), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, a number + a character, etc.), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating laterally at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the left decorative symbol 8L. It fluctuates while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. It fluctuates while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller with movement, and the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger with movement, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73. To. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were all displayed in a variable manner while moving in different directions, but the movement of two decorative symbols out of the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be variablely displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be variablely displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. ..
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R other than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the stop display position are produced so as to disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position is displayed so as to remain without disappearing. May be good.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the first aspect (for example, numbers and the like), and change from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, numbers + characters). Is displayed, and is stopped and displayed in the second aspect. The aspect here includes various aspects such as the type, color, and shape of an image representing a decorative pattern. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Further, the number of changes may be once or a plurality of times.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed in this order, changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and stopped, but the variable display and the aspect are displayed. The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed in the first aspect, and
A second effect in which the decorative pattern is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect and displayed.
It is possible to execute the third effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second aspect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-3]
A game machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2.
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first aspect to the second aspect while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
The decorative design has a first decorative design and a second decorative design.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along the first direction.
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display fluctuates while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4.
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, the variable display is performed while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-6]
A game machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5.
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is gradually displayed smaller as it moves.
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is gradually displayed larger as it moves.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation region effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative symbol variation region effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation area effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect A. In the decorative symbol variation area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the first 2 Stop display is performed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect B. In the decorative symbol variation area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and are left-decorated. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is visibly displayed through the transparent left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) moves downward as it is without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. .. That is, it does not form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol). The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and is combined with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) to form a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and the first 2 Stop display is performed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), in the second display area R2, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were stopped and displayed disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decoration The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have disappeared again appear again. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 in a reduced state. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Decorative pattern fluctuation area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation region effect C. In the decorative symbol variation area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with (design). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in the second display area R2 which is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the first display area R1, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were variablely displayed, disappear from the first display area R1 and the left decoration The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). Then, whether or not to form a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the number "3" symbol) while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Reach fan production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the number “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol) and the right decorative symbol 8R (number "3" symbol) form a reach state. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative symbol 8R. After forming the reach state, another reach effect may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), an effect in which the once disappeared intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears is executed. Specifically, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the number "2" symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. Stop is displayed at the intermediate position. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76 (A)). That is, the enlarged intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (reducing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7. After the first effect in which 8R is variablely displayed and the first effect, in the second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, 8R can be executed as a second effect in which the 8C and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a variable manner than in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are enlarged and variablely displayed is the first display area R1. It is displayed overlapping with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state is produced. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 after the second effect. The third effect to be performed can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute the fourth effect, which does not form a state and is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move while being reduced from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1. It is possible to further perform the fifth effect displayed as. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation area effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation region effects A to C, the first display region R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape, but is not limited to this, and has a circular shape. It may be oval, square, or the like. Further, various shapes can be adopted as the shape of the second display area R2. Further, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area effects A to C, at least a part of the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so as to overlap the first display area R1. , It may be displayed so as not to overlap the first display area R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation region effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a variable manner in the reach fanning effect of whether or not to form a reach state, but other In various effects, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed in this order, but the order of the stop display is not limited to this, and may be any order. May be good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
In the first region of the display means, the first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed, and
After the first effect, in the second area including the first area of the display means, the decorative symbol is enlarged and variablely displayed as compared with the first effect. Is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
In the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbol that is enlarged and variedly displayed is displayed so as to overlap the first area.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-3]
A game machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2.
In the first effect, after the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first region of the display means, the decorative symbol disappears from the first region.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
In the second election, whether or not the decorative symbol forms a reach state is produced.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative symbol forms a reach state can be further performed in the second region of the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4.
After the second effect, in the second region of the display means, the decorative symbol does not form a reach state, and a fourth effect of being stopped and displayed with a lost symbol can be further executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-6.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further perform a fifth effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while being reduced.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. This operation promotion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation promotion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation promotion effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the size change effect is executed. The size change effect is an effect of increasing the size of the button image BG and displaying it. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect of displaying a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, and rotating the button image BG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG of "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect of displaying a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface, and rotating the button image BG about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, the message image MG of "victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game. Further, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7". A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, the white upper surface is changed to blue, green, and red. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by the arrow YG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire display screen 7a does not fit. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

When the player presses the effect button 63, the press promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (G). In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8". The message image MG "defeated" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. In some cases, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may be shifted to the final stop effect (loss) in FIG. 79 (H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG which is an image imitating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as indicated by an arrow YG (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77) E), FIG. 78 (E), FIG. 79 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a, and a portion that is not displayed at the end is formed (FIGS. 77 (F), 78 (F), 79 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed by the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing toward the front gradually becomes upward. Then, the button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the message image MG "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77 (G), 78 (G), 79 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of displaying the button image BG is performed first (FIGS. 77 (C) (D), 78 (C), 79 (A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to the improvement of the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79 (H). That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but either the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of the effect in the fluctuation during the time-saving game, but it may be applied to the fluctuation during the normal game in which the player is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, a size change effect (FIG. 77 (D)) and a color change effect (FIG. 79 (D)) were performed. Such a size change effect or a color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the ball. For example, it is conceivable to set the timing when the second special figure hold increases. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set the timing of over winning.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
In the operation promotion effect of promoting the operation of the operation unit, an image of the operation unit imitating the operation unit is displayed on the display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and is rotated about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect to make
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
The operation promotion effect includes an enlarged effect in which the entire image of the operation unit does not fit on the display screen and its end is not displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral edge portion to the other peripheral edge portion so as to cross the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
The operation promotion effect includes a promotion effect that displays an image of the operation unit and encourages pressing of the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
After the display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in the display screen, the operation promotion effect shifts to the operation promotion effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5.
Even when the display effect is executed, it may not shift to the operation promotion effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or aspect B1-6.
In the display effect, the jackpot expectation is suggested when the game ball enters a predetermined entry port.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7.
The display effect is executed from the start of the change of the effect symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the pressing promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Further, the stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top. The pressing promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, it is shown that the stocked button image BG is used up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbol is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we are getting two button image BGs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of five button image BGs are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, the button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (F). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG will be the reward for the battle production. The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and a total of eight button image BGs are stocked. The number of button image BG stocks suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). )), After that, the player presses the effect button 63 to perform a press promotion effect that digests the stocked button image BG (FIGS. 80 (E) (F), 81 (E) (F)). , A jackpot confirmation effect is performed in the middle of the pressing promotion effect (Fig. 80 (G)). According to this configuration, the winning of the big hit is notified by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed a plurality of times. In addition, one or more button image BGs are stocked in one button get effect (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F)). ). According to this configuration, the stock of the button image BG that enables the operation of the effect button 63 is gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stock number of the button image BG produced by the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, the number of stocks of the button image BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation effect for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot (FIGS. 80 (G) and 82 (G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, it is possible to immerse in a sense of superiority and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the button get effect is executed, the jackpot confirmation effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82 (B), (D), (F), (G). )). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, as a big hit confirmation effect, a ally character CRA is introduced and the background is a rainbow background RB. On the other hand, any effect may be used to notify the confirmation of the jackpot. For example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be rotated in a so-called doublet state to perform a full rotation effect. Further, for example, it may be a premier effect of displaying a premium image in which a jackpot is confirmed. For example, the effect button 63 may be vibrated, air may be sent to the player, or a specific lamp may be turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the press promotion effect, the button image BG stocked on the right side is digested in order from the top (FIG. 81 (F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed and the stocked button image BG is used up, the player is rejected (FIG. 81 (G)). On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that clearly indicates that the player has been rejected in the middle of the pressing promotion effect.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example of notifying the winner of the jackpot lottery, but even if the winner of the lottery for the number of rounds when the jackpot is hit or the winner of the furnace in the transition lottery to the high accuracy state after the jackpot game is notified. Good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
The first effect in which the operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on the display screen, the second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit, and the first effect. 2 It is possible to execute a winning notification production including a third production that can notify the winning in a specific lottery in the middle of the production.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The first effect is an effect in which one or more images of the operation unit are stocked a plurality of times.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
The number of stocks of the operation unit image in the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
The specific lottery in the third production is a big hit lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
The third effect is a definite effect that notifies the confirmation of the jackpot.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5.
It is possible to execute the third effect after the first effect without executing the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
The final effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates in a state where the effect symbols are aligned.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation unit image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as during a variable effect of a decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83A, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R while the number of rounds for the jackpot has already been 4R (round promotion production). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see.
Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (E) and 83 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG overlaps the upper part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation unit image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R while the number of rounds for the jackpot has already been 4R (round promotion production). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG except that the size is different. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (E) and 84 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84 (G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, the character image MG4 of "push in !!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG overlaps the upper part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and the MAX acquisition is confirmed, the character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ..

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), during the round game after the jackpot is confirmed, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge production) will be performed. Here, it is a production aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R while the number of rounds for the jackpot has already been 4R (round promotion production). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the character image MG1 of "MAX acquisition challenge!" Is displayed. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge production may be performed during the round game or before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of "one shot!" Is displayed. This suggests that an effect of determining whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation is performed. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is in a state where it can be visually recognized. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. Of the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and 85 (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), the button image BG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button image BG of FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the button image BG and is displayed in front of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and here, the character image MG6 of "press !!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front surface of the button image BG so as to overlap the upper part of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), when the player presses the effect button 63 and cannot acquire MAX, the character image MG7 of "MAX acquisition failed!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. To.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the button image BG (first operation unit image) and the sword image KG (second operation unit image) are displayed so as to overlap each other. And the second effect in which either the button image BG or the sword image KG is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visually recognized through the button image BG. Displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, a third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect and the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect are different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a big hit game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot (MAX acquisition challenge effect). It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in an effect of determining whether or not a specific effect is successful, an effect of determining whether or not it is a big hit, an effect of determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, and the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed, but the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. It may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are the same as the image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 as the button image BG and the sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although the image is used, as the operation unit image, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, an image showing the appearance of various other operation units, and the like can be used.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Further, in the background image, the portion where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
The first operation unit and the second operation unit that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit.
A first effect in which the image of the first operation unit and the image of the second operation unit are displayed so as to overlap with each other.
It is possible to execute a second effect in which either one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the second operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is visibly displayed through the first operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3.
Prior to the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the first operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the third effect, the portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5.
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The appearance / disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In FIGS. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing. is there.

The appearance / disappearance effect of this effect button is executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change), or during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player. This is possible, and the intention of the player to operate the effect button 63 (press operation) can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands) When an instruction to execute the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button is included in the analysis, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described in order.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons A]
First, the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Appearance and disappearance of the effect button In the effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

When the reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the reach is formed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed. The appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is started, the timing is started, and the effect button is displayed until the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate the effect button 63 (press operation). Appearance and disappearance of the effect button It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86 (B). On the upper left side of the screen 7a, an image same as or similar to the first effect button image BTN (an image in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or an image similar to the first effect button image (part or all of the characteristic information). The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different), and the player can operate (press) the effect button 63. In order to prompt the operation), the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. ..

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears as shown in FIG. 86 (C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN displays an image in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition to being displayed, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN displays an image in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

After that, when the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When 7 ”) are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In the state where the reach shown in FIG. 86A is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If no operation is performed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to 86 (E), which is performed during the effect disappearance effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appearance / disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 86 (F) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN. There is.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons B]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Appearance and disappearance of the effect button In the effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

When the reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged in and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the reach is formed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed. The appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is started, the timing is started, and the effect button is displayed until the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period. It is possible to perform the appearance and disappearance production of. In other words, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button defines an effective period during which the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed, and the player intends to operate the effect button 63 (press operation). Appearance and disappearance of the effect button It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance / disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (B). A hole image MH that imitates a hole in a mogura is displayed on the left side and a right side of the screen 7a, respectively, and a hole image MH that imitates a hole in a mogura is formed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Hole images MH that imitate holes in the mogura are displayed on the left and right sides near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and five holes that imitate the holes in the mogura are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole image MHs have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

From the hole image MH on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 near the upper side, an image imitating a mole with a grinning face (hereinafter referred to as "Nico Nico mole image") "MCH1 is displayed in a manner of showing a face. , An image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or an image similar to the image (one with the characteristic information) above the NicoNico mole image MCH1. The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a part or all similar images (the light emitting modes may be the same or different). At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the same time, an image imitating a mole having a face that turns its eyes and is dazzling from the smiley mole image MCH1 (hereinafter, , "Kurakuramogura image".) Displayed in a changed mode to MCH2. The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is an image display device in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), colored glasses (for example, black glasses) are displayed from the hall image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. An image imitating a mogura having a face with a spectacle (hereinafter referred to as "glasses mogura image") "MCH3 is displayed in a manner of showing a face. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and appears above the glasses mole image MCH3 together with the glasses mole image MCH3.

When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times), as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the display is displayed in a manner changed from the glasses mole image MCH3 to the black mole image MCH2. To. Unlike the Nico Nico Mole image MCH1, the Mole image MCH3 is struck strongly, and when the Mole image MCH3 appears, the effect button 63 must be operated (pressed three times) a plurality of times (pressed). It is designed so that the mole image MCH3 does not change to the mole image MCH2. The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued. Further, when the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the eyeglasses mogura image MCH3 together with the eyeglasses mogura image MCH3, the player presses the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, 3). When the operation (pressing operation) is performed only once (times), the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a mode in which the glasses mogura image MCH3 is changed to the clutter mogul image MCH2. Will be done.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the NicoNico mole image MCH1 makes a face from the hall image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition to being displayed in a mode of displaying, the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in a mode of being arranged and appearing above the NicoNico mole image MCH1. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. It disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a manner changed from the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 to the Kurakura mole image MCH 2. The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is an image display device in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the Niconico mole image MCH1 appears from the hall image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), the display is changed from the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 to the Kurakura mole image MCH 2. The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emitting mode is continued.

After that, when the end of the effect disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance / disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is a number “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is a number “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it was stopped and displayed as "7" and the deviation was confirmed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When 7 ”) are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives a profit to the player is performed.

In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at all. If no operation is performed, the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87 (B) to 87 (I), which is performed during the effect disappearance effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appearance / disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 87 (J) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the Nico Nico mole image MCH 1 and the glasses mole image MCH 3 appear.

[Appearance and disappearance of production buttons C]
Next, the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button is performed during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the jackpot effect is performed). Before the end, if there is a big hit in the reserved ball, so-called "holding ream", it will not be done). The presence or absence of this pending ream is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command. If the hold ream is not produced, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect is completed.

In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is specified from the period from the start to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). During the period, the effect mode selection screen is displayed so that the player can select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of a second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) and. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game)). In order to perform a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game is displayed, the beginning of this predetermined period and the end of the specific period match. ing.

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 displays an image in order to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating (pressing the effect) the effect button 63. It is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking.

The effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of the other effect modes is displayed on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. When the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in a specific area as a default, but when the production mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time.

To the right of the selection unit SEL, a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters is on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, and is the same image as the first production button image BTN. (Images in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or similar images (images that are partially or all similar to the characteristic information (light emission modes may be the same or different) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demo area DS as ()). An explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the production in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (B). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (C). When the B mode goes downward, the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (D). When the C mode moves downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the lower side to the upper side, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 88 (E). When the D mode moves downward, the C mode located below the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates toward the region, and the A mode is again in the display mode in which the reel is located in the specific region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, in a state where the A mode is in the display mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the first period for selecting the effect mode (effect mode selection period) elapses, and the selected effect mode is entered. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed in a mode that expands toward the four corners (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a theme that imitates the "sun" that progresses with the theme of "sun" in A mode. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the A mode is displayed in a large size from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the right side on the right side of the theme image PM. , The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses and the start of this predetermined period arrives in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is,). During a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed, and attention is paid to the dependence on the game (enthusiasm). Is displayed, and when the end of a predetermined period, that is, the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the production is performed with the theme of "sun" in A mode, as shown in FIG. 88 (G). The theme image PM imitating the advancing "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21), the front of the theme image PM is displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a (design: number "1" to number "9"). The variable display is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the theme image PM, which is a background image arranged behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

In this way, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the reel rotates in the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches a specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in the demo area DS, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance / disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7. It is designed to disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player and the effect button 63 (operation means). An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is an image display device 7. A second effect button image BTN2 (second) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means) while being displayed on the (display means). The first effect in which the operation means image of 2 is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed in the image display device 7 (display). At least one of the second effects that are hidden from the means) (disappear (disappear) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. According to this configuration, a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means). ) Can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means)), so that the player can be visually recognized. It can be entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Is the first effect button image BTN (first operation) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). It is displayed at a different position from the means image). For example, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the second effect button image BTN2 (second effect button image BTN2). The operation means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display) is arranged so that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are arranged differently. Since it is displayed on the means), the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the effect button appearance / disappearance effect B of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is located in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While it is displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or on the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is displayed, it is the same.
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While it is displayed, a second effect button is displayed in the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). This is the same because the image BTN2 (second operating means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image). Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed by the image display device 7 (display means). ), The second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) of 1 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually an image. When it is displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode, which can visually entertain the player. Can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the jackpot effect (big hit game) ends in a specific period of the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). When the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the later effect mode is displayed (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. When A mode is selected after being displayed on 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode is actually selected. When the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the display mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. As a result, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the effect button appearance / disappearance effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) has a left decorative symbol 8L. The reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined production is a reach production. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be a period during which the reach effect is performed. , In addition to the image produced by the reach effect, after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. Therefore, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot effect (hit game). The predetermined effect in which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot effect (effect of a winning game). Is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the period during which the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game) is performed. Of these, a specific period can be set, and in addition to the image produced by the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image). And the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). ) Colors can be used to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect buttons of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the appearance / disappearance effect of the effect button.
[Modification 1]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is imitated. Based on the fact that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed). A first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect. Effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). I was able to do one or the other. However, instead of the effect button 63 (operating means), the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used. In this case, in the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the sword member 64. The image imitates the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
Appearance and disappearance of the effect button in FIG. 86 In the effect A, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect button 63 was operated (pressed) again (disappeared), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). .. However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, ..., 9 times, 10 times, a predetermined fixed number, or 2 to 10 times, only the random number set in real time by the lottery in the production control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) The operation (pressing operation) may be performed. In this way, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It can contribute to eliminating the monotony of being (appearing). Further, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) in the image display device 7 (display means). Since the player can discover the correspondence relationship of being displayed (appearing) by himself / herself, it is difficult to feel the monotony of the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, thereby suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play. It can also contribute to that.

[Modification 3]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Each time (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. May be good. In this case, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressing operation), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the image may be kept at a certain size from before the maximum size (the size several steps before the maximum size (in the middle)). By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be generated, and the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be performed. It can contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant.

[Modification example 4]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur in which the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is given to the player each time (disappears) and is displayed (appears). The color may be gradually changed to enhance the feeling. For example, it gradually changes from white to blue to green to red to golden to seven colors (rainbow colors). In this way, it is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant to operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be a video by 3D CG, a video by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operation means). The effect button 63 (operation) is based on the fact that the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect button image BTN2 (means) The second effect, in which the second operating means image) is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)), can be executed. .. However, with the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) Is operated (pressed), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is executed, and for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only 10 times (when the pressing operation is performed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is accompanied by the operation. Is hidden in the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)), and the second effect may be executed. The effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Each time an operation is performed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (image display device). The second effect that disappears (disappears) from 7 (display means) is executed. For example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only 10 times (when pressed, the second effect button is accompanied by the operation). The image BTN2 (second operating means image) may be able to execute the first effect of being displayed (appearing) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game). Later, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as the effect of the hit game, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect. The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the second effect during the effect in the small hit game instead of the jackpot effect. After the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) of 1 is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means image). It may be displayed on the display means).

[Modification 8]
The appearance / disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the appearance / disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance / disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. 88 may not include a part of the described effects, or the like. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying various images.
Based on the fact that the operating means is operated while the image of the first operating means imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means.
A first effect in which an image of the second operating means imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means, and
A second effect in which the image of the second operating means is hidden from the display means, and
Can do at least one of them,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
The second operating means image is displayed at a position different from that of the first operating means image in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
The first operating means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect.
The second operating means image can be displayed after the first operating means image is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the reach effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern.
The predetermined effect is the reach effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
The display means can display the effect of the winning game.
The predetermined effect is the effect of the hit game.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5.
The color of the first operating means image and the color of the second operating means image are the same color.
A game machine characterized by that.

The winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

In all of the winning notification effects A to C, the effect button 63 is enabled during the battle effect, and when the number of operations of the effect button 63 reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14, the jackpot confirmation effect is achieved. It is a production to execute. If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching 14 times, the loss is confirmed.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (mid-term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation effect was executed when the operation of the effect button 63 reached 12 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, although the display screen 7a is not displayed to prompt the pressing of the effect button 63, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects the operation of. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect in which a ally character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big hit" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation effect was executed when the operation of the effect button 63 reached 5 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB will appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 5 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (mid-term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character "press" is displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle production (final stage) is a production that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center, and the message image MG of "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the effect button 63 during the battle effect, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number of operations. (Fig. 89 (E) (F), Fig. 90 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of operation times of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times are set as predetermined operation times. According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of timings at which the jackpot confirmation effect may be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed by 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91 (E)), the loss in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without having unnecessary expectations.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is not performed during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E) and 90 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it a back command-like production only for the players who know it.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled, there are cases where the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 91 (C) to (E)), and there are cases where the effect button 63 is not performed. (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the effect button 63 has been illustrated above, it can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword, or the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was an example of notifying the winning of the big hit lottery, but it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the winning in the lottery to shift to the high accuracy state after the big hit. is there.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can perform an effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined number of operations.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
If there is no notification of winning even if the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, the loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, the promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit is not performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
During the predetermined effect, there are cases where a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit is performed, and cases where the promotion effect is not performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the outer shell inner / outer effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image display device 7 The decorative design and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawing.

The outer / outer effect of this three-dimensional image is executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change), or during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. It can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and buttons. When an instruction to execute the effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, the outer outer inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image, and the outer inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Outside and outside production A of stereoscopic image]
First, the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and swings (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as a boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). When it is displayed on 7a or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes higher or lower. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is lowered or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the frame of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be increased, or one or both may be decreased. It is displayed in the mode of At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer region (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image. It will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After that, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are divided into regions. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the first geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval). The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM is displayed as a second geometric pattern by switching to a stack of bricks. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character body CRA appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

One or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are increased, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and inside the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the region FRMa is displayed large, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes small and the image display device 7 is displayed. The proportion occupied by the screen 7a becomes low. On the other hand, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the inner region FRMa of (contour) is displayed small, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large and the image The proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode, or is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. Similarly, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, and the frame becomes associated with this. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM to occupy the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low or high.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, the image is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the framed stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is displayed again, and a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both are increased or one or both are decreased. To.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) to the third geometry in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. As a scholarly pattern, the octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval, arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, and switched to a matrix-like display. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, a character body CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, the image is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the framed stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) Is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched and appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both are increased or one or both are decreased. ..

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM, the alphabet V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as a fourth geometric pattern and displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB move closer to each other in the inner region FRMa. Will be played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and an action effect by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed by the image display device 7. It will be displayed large on the screen 7a.

When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols with the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), the action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

In addition, when one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, or the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large. As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), in addition to the character, the area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized is expanded. In addition, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the size of the character is displayed large, the size of the character is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside and outside production B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or rocking manner. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as a boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). When it is displayed on 7a or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. When the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) displays an image. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is reduced or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image board is colored and opaque from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched as a three-dimensional image FRM, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer region (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image. It will be partitioned into the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are divided into regions. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (outline) of). The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM is displayed as a second geometric pattern by switching to a stack of bricks. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character body CRA appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced. The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape is also deformed.

When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size and the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. As the ratio occupied by 7a becomes higher, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed small and the image is displayed. As the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the device 7 becomes low, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes large, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes high.

After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. As the proportion of 7a becomes higher or lower, the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. It gets expensive.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, the image is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is again colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. As a geometric pattern, the octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval, arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, and switched to a matrix-like display. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, a character body CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image again to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched to the colored-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) Is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is switched and appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM, the fourth geometric pattern is displayed by switching to an alphabetic V-shape arranged continuously in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB move closer to each other in the inner region FRMa. Will be played. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and an action effect by two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed by the image display device 7. It will be displayed large on the screen 7a.

When a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols having the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), the action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

As the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes farther (moves toward the player side). By moving away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), in addition to the character, the area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized is expanded. Further, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases accordingly. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player side) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the size of the character is displayed large, the size of the character is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside and outside production C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer / outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is colored and opaque as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary with the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is divided into regions. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). With (contour) as a boundary, the area of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") It is partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed in a large size. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes low, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes large and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 The percentage of the total is high.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). When it is displayed on 7a or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the image display device 7 occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes higher or lower. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is lowered or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is provided on the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), as the first geometric pattern, quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. ”) Is switched to the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (hereinafter referred to as the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”)), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”) appears, it is approaching or far away. It is displayed in a mode of moving, stopping, or moving in the vertical and horizontal directions. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary with the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary. ), And the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is the background image.

After this, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is viewed from the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "number"). The inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and the outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front with the outer shell (contour) of "4") as a boundary. It is partitioned into the outer region FRMb of (contour) and the region of. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. The first geometric pattern displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") (a pattern in which the squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions separated from each other by a predetermined interval. ) To the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), which is displayed by switching to a stack of bricks as a second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRB appears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. ..

When the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Since the FRMa is displayed large and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is high, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes small and the image display device 7 The ratio of the display screen 7a is low. On the other hand, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outer shell (number "4") of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Since the inner region FRMa of the contour) is displayed small and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is low, the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is large. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is similarly viewed. As the ratio of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the stereoscopic image FRM (front view) is viewed accordingly. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the number “4”) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The second geometric pattern (pattern in which bricks are piled up) displayed on the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ”) is changed to the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number“ 4 ”). It is inherited and displayed as it is, and it does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image and the color-opaque frontal view again. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, distant, stopping, moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. Outer region of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") The outer shell of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed on the FRMb. As a third geometric pattern, octagons are displayed in the outer region FRMb of (contour) by being separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and switched to a matrix-like arrangement. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

Further, here, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") protrudes (jumps out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") Two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as discontinuous regions of the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the image display device 7, and straddle the two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa. In the embodiment, a character body CRA holding a sword newly appears and moves in two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are separated from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ") is three-dimensional. It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is displayed as a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (front view). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched to the number "4") and viewed from the front, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A third geometric pattern (octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions, separated from each other by a predetermined interval) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). (Pattern) is switched to a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") in which the alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as the fourth geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour). Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRB reappears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. When the image is switched to (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is colored and opaque as a predetermined image is switched to the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is opaque and colored again, the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of 4 ") is the stereoscopic image FRM (number" 4 "). It is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image is displayed as a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (front view). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that is viewed from the front appears after switching to the number "4"), it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving in the vertical and horizontal directions, and stopping.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic image is displayed at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A stereoscopic image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). It is displayed by switching to a fifth geometric pattern in which tiles are arranged side by side in the vertical and horizontal directions in the outer region FRMb of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4"). The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRA reappears and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are the image display device 7. Is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the above, and the action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the background images of the two character CRA and CRB are also displayed. It will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. If the symbols with the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed during the jackpot game (big hit effect), the action effect is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA is defeated in the game with the character RCB (for example). Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

As the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches (moves toward the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes large. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes far away (moves away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is As the size becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of is not displayed in a large size (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can be expanded. Further, as the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accompanied by this. The size of the character displayed on the inner region FRMa of the character is not displayed (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the character displayed in the outer region (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When approaching (moving toward the player side), the size of the character is displayed large, while when moving far (moving away from the player side), the size of the character is displayed small. ..

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the outer / outer effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, an image display capable of displaying various images is displayed. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is formed inside. Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first area) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). Image) A background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image formed on the outside of the FRM. The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). And the character body CRB (first effect image) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). ) With a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer shell inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). It is formed outside the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). It is possible to perform an effect with a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image is formed inside the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Front-viewed stereoscopic image The character-body CRA and character-body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image. A background image (second) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") formed outside the image FRM. This is the same because it is possible to execute the effect of (effect image) and.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) and the outer region FRMb (second) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area). According to this configuration, the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. , Frame-shaped stereoscopic image Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer shell (contour) of the image as a boundary, and the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the character is set in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM has various geometric patterns. Since the background image (second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and the same with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is shown. While the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the image, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed. Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of), the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other, and are the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). The image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is small and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the character is bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. A frame-shaped stereoscopic image in which the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed. When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the FRM becomes large, a background image having various geometric patterns. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the (second effect image) is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). By doing so, the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) becomes large, the outer region FRMb (second) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. This is the same because the area of) becomes smaller.
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is the image display device 7 (predetermined image). By moving and displaying on the display means), the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes large, a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. This is the same because the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer shell inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined). Image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, by using the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM , The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are easily recognized as a partitioned region. It is displayed in the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a boundary to form a plate. Area in which the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are partitioned. Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first area) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), which is a stereoscopic image, is shown. By using the outer shell (contour) as a boundary, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") has the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of ()) and the inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are easily visible as a partitioned region. The outer region FRMb (third) of the outer shell (contour) of the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the FRMa (first region) and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. This is the same because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area (2).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image, the outer shell of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) serves as an inner region of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image. It is the outer region of the outer shell (contour) of. According to this configuration, since the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ) And the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the game, the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interests.
In the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image can be used as a boundary. , The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are partitioned. It becomes easier to see as an area. As a result, the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since it can contribute to the improvement of visibility with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the above, the same applies. Is.
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) which is a stereoscopic image is shown. Since the outer shell (contour) can be used as a boundary, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") has an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) and a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "number"). The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of "4") and the region are more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are combined with each other. Visual recognition of a background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The same applies because it can contribute to the improvement of the property.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the outer / outer effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In the FRM, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, it is the title (or a characteristic word included in the title) of any of the plurality of music used as a predetermined image to show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. It may be a structure (which may be flat or three-dimensional) to which the title of the music can be associated (image).

[Modification 2]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In the FRM, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, it may be the one described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 as a predetermined image (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In the FRM, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digested image 9C and the reserved image are bounded by the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. It can be divided into regions 9A and 9B and an outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved digestion image 9C. Still images and moving images (movies by 3D CG, moving images by animation, one scene of a movie) are displayed in the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. In the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C, a background image (still image, moving image (moving by 3D CG, moving image by animation, one scene of a movie) )) Is displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In the FRM, the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, was used as a predetermined image. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner region (contour) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is defined as the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Area 1) and the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the inner area (first area) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, still images and moving images (movies by 3D CG, moving images by animation, and one scene of a movie) ) Is displayed, and in the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, a background image (still image, moving image (moving image by 3D CG), Animated video, movie scene)) is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and the outer shell inner / outer effect of the stereoscopic image of FIG. In B, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image is used as a predetermined image. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of a certain front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) was a background image having various geometric patterns as still images. However, the background image may be replaced with a still image as a moving image, or a still image and a moving image may be mixed. The moving image may be, for example, a moving image of various geometric patterns, a moving image by three-dimensional CG, an animated moving image, or a scene of a movie.

[Modification 6]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the outer shell inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, a plate which is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. The three-dimensional image FRM in the shape, the outer shell inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 94 is a three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is one three-dimensional image as a predetermined image, and is a predetermined image in any of the effects. Was one stereoscopic image. However, a plurality of stereoscopic images may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the outer region (second region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be the same image (background image) or different, and one image may be used as each stereoscopic image. It may be displayed so that the entire image of one image can be grasped through the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the three-dimensional image, or the inner region (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of each stereoscopic image. The same image may be displayed in the area of), or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, becomes larger, or one or both becomes smaller. It was displayed in such a manner. However, the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The outer region FRMb (second) of the outer shell (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform the production with the background image (second production image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the area), the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. be able to.

[Modification 8]
In the outer shell internal / external effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is the image display device 7 (predetermined image). Although it was moved and displayed on the display means), it is not limited to the front view, and the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) may be a display mode that rotates in a three-dimensional space or a display mode that rotates and moves. Good. In this case, when the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in an approaching manner and a part thereof protrudes (jumps out) from the image display device 7 (display means), the stereoscopic image is discontinuous. A plurality of stereoscopic images that have become image FRMs (predetermined images) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa of the outer shell (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image), ... A plurality of independent inner regions are formed in the image display device 7 (display means) as regions in which the FRMa is discontinuous. In an manner straddling a plurality of independent inner regions FRMa ... FRMa formed in this way, a character body CRA or a character body CRB appears and moves in a plurality of independent inner regions FRMa ... FRMa formed. As an aspect, the moving image of the character body CRA or the character body CRB is reproduced.

[Modification 9]
The outer shell inner / outer effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 92, the outer outer inner / outer effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 93, and the outer outer / outer effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 94 may not include a part of the described effects. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
When a predetermined image is displayed on the display means, a first effect image to be displayed in a first region formed inside the predetermined image and a second effect image formed outside the predetermined image. It is possible to execute the effect by the second effect image displayed in the area.
The predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1.
The first effect image and the second effect image are different.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2.
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is large and displayed on the display means, the second area is small and displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
The first region is an inner region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
The second region is an outer region of the outer shell of the stereoscopic image with the outer shell of the stereoscopic image as a boundary.
A game machine characterized by that.

The selection display blocking effects A to C of the effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the image is displayed. Some of the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

This effect mode selection display blocking effect can be executed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, a specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit, and the like. , The intention of the player to operate the effect button 63 (press operation) can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands) When an instruction to analyze and execute the button effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode, and the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described in order.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect A]
First, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode. The selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

With the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 is only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The pending digested image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the special symbol hold, is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the left side of the reserved digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A are linearly displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as three first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the screen 7a. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 95 (A) starts to fluctuate, reach may not be formed or reach may be formed. When the reach is formed, the reach is produced based on the expectation that it will be a big hit. There are multiple reach productions. When a reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (B) following FIG. 95 (A), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number). The cage (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is linearly arranged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. The reel is displayed in a mode of rotation, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then. , The left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed.

When the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and is stopped and displayed, it continues until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative symbol change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (D), the reach was not formed, whereas in the case where the reach was formed, the reach was formed. Following FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates. When the display and reach are formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), at this point, the selection unit SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL can be moved downward, and the effect mode can be selected. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, four reserved images 9A are placed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. The images are linearly arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), a car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the effect of traveling all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL is displayed from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 after disappearing (disappears), the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. It has become. Even if the group notice is given, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reach effect progresses, the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "0", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "1" and is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed. .. Even in this state, the selection unit SEL is in a state of disappearing (disappearing) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. The selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

Since the group notice was given, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the detachment is confirmed and displayed. However, the effect mode cannot be selected, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even during the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group notice is given, the already selected effect mode is continued and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 unless the next decorative symbol starts to change. It will be displayed large in 7a. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 95 (J), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect B]
Next, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode. The selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. In the effect mode selection display blocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the "cloud") arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop.

With the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 is only for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The pending digested image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the special symbol hold, is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the left side of the reserved digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A are linearly displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as three first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the screen 7a. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

On the right side of the hold digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, a model of a “cloud”) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "clouds" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 96 (A) starts to fluctuate, there is a case where an effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a big hit (so-called “look-ahead effect”) is not performed. A look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A may be performed. When the look-ahead effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B) following FIG. 96 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. (Here, it is temporarily stopped by the number "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode moves from the bottom to the top. It is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is inside. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure hold does not increase because the upper limit of the four first special figure holds has already been reached, and the five hold images 9A are displayed. The image display device 7 is linearly arranged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode moves from the bottom to the top. The reel is displayed in a mode of rotation, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from above toward a specific region. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the theme image PM imitating "snow" is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "5" temporarily stops), and then. , The left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is performed, and the deviation is confirmed.

When the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and is stopped and displayed, it continues until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the interval, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative symbol change starts, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 96E, the image display device 7 is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (D), the effect suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a jackpot (so-called so-called). "Look-ahead effect") was not performed, but when the look-ahead effect for the reserved image 9A is performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (G) following FIG. 96 (A). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "1" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. It has become. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. If the hold image 9A placed closest to the hold digest image 9C is the first hold image 9A, the second hold image 9A is placed to the left of the first hold image 9A and the second hold image 9A. The third reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9A added by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20 this time to the left of the third reserved image 9A. Is arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the fourth hold image 9A may include a jackpot is performed, the display mode of the fourth hold image 9A is changed as a special image. It is displayed differently from the display mode of the reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) based on the expectation of a big hit. Expectations for big hits are set high. Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is such that it emits red light, and another reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). ) Is displayed in a white light emission mode (when the look-ahead effect is not performed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is the lowest).

In the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) based on the expectation of a big hit. ), Which is expected to be a big hit, but it may be a character body instead of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape. In this case, in the mode in which the reserved image 9A is displayed in a character body, the expected degree of jackpot is at least equal to or higher than the expected degree of jackpot set in the mode in which the reserved image 9A is displayed in red. Is set to.

When the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Even if the operation (pressing operation) is performed, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the look-ahead effect is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C are not erased (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "3" is used. Temporary stop), the middle decoration symbol 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols (numbers) (here, the decorative symbol 8C). (Temporarily stopped at the number "5"), then the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the stop display is confirmed. Is displayed.

After that, when the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), it is linearly aligned with the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side of the four reserved images 9A moved to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A move to the right one by one. It is displayed with a shift. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the pre-reading effect has already been performed, so that the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even in this state. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the effect mode is selected during the change before the look-ahead effect is performed. However, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Further, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed moves to the right as the hold digestion image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to change, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are started to change. In the period from the stop display of 8R to the confirmation display of the loss, the player can select the effect mode even in the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. Even if you operate (press operation), you cannot select the effect mode. Further, the period from when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reserved image 9A where the look-ahead effect is performed is stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change (hereinafter, "interval"). ”), Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, in such a series of periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digestion image 9C. The selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the hold image 9A on which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the hold digest image 9C and becomes a big hit, the effect button 63 is operated as shown in FIG. 96 (A) after the big hit effect is completed. A message MG of "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by pressing operation) is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is displayed, and the effect mode can be selected.

Further, even if the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect mode already selected is selected after the demo screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating the "cloud" is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Direction mode selection display prevention effect C]
Next, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode. The effect mode selection display prevention effect C is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is an effect that is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "holding ream" in which there is a big hit in the holding ball before the jackpot production ends). The presence or absence of this pending ream is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

Here, a case will be described in which a player plays a right-handed game and becomes a big hit to generate a big hit game (big hit effect), and continues the right-handed game after the big hit game (big hit effect) is completed. If the hold ream is not produced, in other words, there is no jackpot in the hold ball before the jackpot effect is completed.

During the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), there is a game production period from the beginning of the jackpot production (big hit game) to the end of each round game, and this game production period. Next, a notification period for notifying the game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed, a state of continuing right-handed) after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), and following this notification period, a jackpot effect (big hit game) A specific period in which the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of is displayed, and a catch phrase effect or game in which the catch phrase of the game machine manufacturer is displayed following this specific period. There is a predetermined period in which a slogan prevention effect is displayed, in which a warning for dependence on addiction is displayed.

In the specific period, in order to convey the mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode and the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. It is composed of a second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) and.

The catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed. The catch phrase effect and the alert for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) are displayed. Is consistent with the end of the period up to.

In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed with each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game), and all of them are finished. By doing so, the end of the game production period is reached, and accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. .. Further, the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Instead of the hold image 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a numerical value HMG, respectively. Here, for example, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where there are four special figure reservations and the number "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

The message MG of "continue right-handed stroke" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed in large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the end of the notification period (for example, 3 seconds) is reached. At the beginning, there are cases where the effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is displayed, and cases where the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. ..

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the effect button 63 is pressed in order to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating (pressing the effect) the effect button 63. The imitated first effect button image BTN is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

An effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated to specify a specific area. The selection unit SEL in which the effect mode reached to is displayed larger than that of the other effect modes is displayed in the rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. When the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in a specific area as a default, but when the production mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, the A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time.

To the right of the selection unit SEL, a demo area DS that explains the contents of the currently selected production mode with various images and various characters is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be done. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the character "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side thereof.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, which is the same image as the first production button image BTN. The second effect button image BTN2 is the demo area DS as (an image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or all similar to the characteristic information). It is placed and displayed on the lower right side. An explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the production in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, it is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL as shown in FIG. 97 (C). When the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the region. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a video in the center of the demo area DS, and the explanation MME about the progress of the production in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

The first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode has elapsed in a state where the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition to the selected effect mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the four corners of the demo area DS, which is a rectangular area, are images. It is displayed in a mode that expands toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the production proceeds with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. A large theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed, and a message MG telling that the selected production mode is B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed larger toward the center. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and a catch phrase effect in which the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed and a slogan prevention effect in which a warning for dependence on the game (enthusiasm) is displayed are performed. The beginning of the period, and when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), a theme image that imitates the "cloud" that progresses the production with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. The effect in which the PM is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is advanced.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed, and accordingly, at the beginning of the specific period, a series from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D). In the effect of, the effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect after the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) is advanced in the selected effect mode. On the other hand, the number "0" is zero for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , The second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the number "4" with four, so the four second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. When the hold information corresponding to the special figure hold includes a big hit, the display of the special image is prioritized and the effect mode selection screen is not displayed in order to perform the effect of the hold series which is a special image. Therefore, when the effect mode selection screen is not displayed, light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions as shown in FIG. 97 (G) following FIG. 97 (A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the hold series image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape suggesting the existence of the hold series is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 97 (H). Hold series having a V shape The first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the HRC, whereas the hold series having a V shape is held. A second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged on the upper side of the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC. The reserved continuous image HRC rotates around the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the reserved continuous image HRC as a rotation axis, and the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC and the second surface of the reserved continuous image HRC appear repeatedly. It becomes a display mode.

When an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A (for example, FIGS. 1 and 96 (G) to 96 (J)) may contain a jackpot is performed, for example, special The display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A as an image is different from the display mode of the other reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). The display mode of the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A has a circular shape, whereas the fourth reserved image 9A is displayed. The display mode of the image 9A may be the first character body HRC1 or the second character body HRC2 instead of the one having a circular shape. That is, the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the hold continuous image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the hold image 9A when the look-ahead effect is performed. It has become.

The character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC. Further, the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC, but the orientation and posture of the characters are different. May be different.

When the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is displayed as a stop facing forward (player side), the second start is not possible although it cannot be notified to the hit type. While it is possible to convey that the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 includes a jackpot, the hold having the second character body HRC2 When the second surface of the continuous image HRC is displayed as a stop facing forward (player side), it corresponds to four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is possible to convey that the hold information includes a predetermined number or more (for example, two) of 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)) of jackpots.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed toward the front (player side), and the second start port 21 is displayed. It is informed that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball. It should be noted that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are image display devices 7 as numerical values HMG. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed, and the period of the slogan prevention effect is displayed, which calls attention to the dependence on the game (getting into the game). This period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. By doing so, it will be the end of the jackpot production (big hit game). At the end of the jackpot production (big hit game), the theme image PM that imitates the production mode before the jackpot production (big hit game) occurs, for example, the "sun" in A mode, is the image. An effect that is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will be advanced.

In addition, when the production of the pending ream is performed, and then the jackpot production (big hit game) ends and the right-handed game is started, when the production mode selection screen is displayed in the previous jackpot production (big hit game). When the effect mode selected in is maintained, the jackpot game (big hit effect) occurs again, and the effect mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the maintained effect mode is set. Although it will be arranged in a specific area, the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

In the present embodiment, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed in the specific period, but the effect of the hold ream is also performed in the same period as this specific period. That is, in the first period (effect mode selection period), the effect mode selection display prevention effect C allows the player to select the effect mode, whereas the hold-ream effect produces a flash image. Directed by FH and reserved continuous image HRC. Then, in the second period (effect mode final notification period), the effect mode selection display prevention effect C performs an effect of transmitting the transition of the selected effect mode, whereas the hold-ream effect has a big hit. Perform a production that conveys. The specific period in which the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode is performed and the specific period in which the effect of the hold ream is performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for a series of productions from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D) following FIG. 97 (A) and FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) following FIG. 97 (A). Since the time required for the series of effects to) matches, the catch phrase of the game machine maker is displayed, and the slogan prevention effect is displayed to alert the player to the dependence on the game. The beginning of the period is also the same, and there is no difference in the end of the jackpot production (big hit game) when this predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selection display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIG. 95 (H) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, and is in the A mode. , B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes), the first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode on the image display device 7 (display means), and At least one of the second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, and when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, The arrival of the next period (predetermined) in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car runs all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to form a group (group notice). Based on the above condition), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 by the first effect is blocked, and the vehicle image imitating the car on the image display device 7 by the second effect. The display of GYK (special image) can be executed. According to this configuration, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) is used as the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car runs all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to form a group (group notice). When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked. As a result, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 96 (H) to 96 (J) In the display blocking effect B, one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (the establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the pre-reading effect which is a special image is performed. Then, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means). This is the same because it is different.
Selection of effect mode of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) In the display blocking effect C, one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even if the SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (the establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold ream, which is a special image, is performed, the hold ream is displayed. When the effect is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means) ( The same is true because it will disappear).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of modes). The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) is to specify the decorative symbol from the start of change to the stop of change. The second effect, which can be executed during a period and displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means), is a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of fluctuation. Can be performed at. According to this configuration, a selection unit capable of selecting one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) in a specific period from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the stop of change. The first effect of displaying the SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). And, because it is possible to execute, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality) are used in a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of fluctuation. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) and the look-ahead effect which is a special image are displayed on the image display device 7. This is the same because the second effect displayed on (display means) can be executed.
In the effect mode selection display blocking effect C of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode are used in a specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit. The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the D modes (plurality of effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the hold sequence which is a special image. This is the same because the second effect of displaying the effect of the above on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, the effect button 63, the sword member 64, which can be operated by the player, The sword button 65 and the select button 68 (plurality of operating means) are provided, and the effect button 63 (specific operating means) of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plurality of operation means) operates. Only when this is done, one of the A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) can be selected. According to this configuration, among the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plural operation means), the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61 is arranged around the front frame (front frame portion) 53. Of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 arranged in, the effect button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the decorative pattern starts to change. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) within the limited period from the period to the stop of the fluctuation. The same applies to the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J) and the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, when the reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, the car is imitated. The arrival of the next period (predetermined conditions) in which the production (group notice) of the car image GYK (special image) running all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the establishment), the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display). Selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) before the second effect displayed on the means) is executed. The effect mode (here, B mode) already selected in the first effect of displaying the image on the image display device 7 (display means) is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished, A mode, B mode, C mode and D Since the effect mode (here, B mode) already selected before the second effect is executed among the modes (plurality effect modes) is maintained, the player is visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second effect of displaying the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended. , A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes), because the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed is maintained. ..
In the effect mode selection display blocking effect C of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), a second effect of displaying the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When finished, the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (plurality of effect modes) is maintained. Is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect A, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of modes). The first effect of displaying the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means) is the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (the effect mode). The names of each of the plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape and displayed in rotation, and one selected effect mode is arranged in the foreground side. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape, the types of selection modes to be rotated and displayed and one effect mode can be used. It is easy to grasp the effect mode that is arranged after that, and since one effect mode that is selected is the display mode that is arranged on the front side, it is easy to select the effect mode and the player can visually see the player. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed. The same applies to the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E) and the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I) of the effect mode selection display blocking effect C, the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, is performed (predetermined). The condition) includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player that there is a jackpot in the reserved ball before the jackpot production is completed by performing the hold ream. it can.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the selection display prevention effect of the effect mode.
[Modification 1]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), the vehicle image GYK (special image) imitating a car is grouped from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 all at once. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions) in which the running effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 (selection image) of the selection unit SEL (selection image) The selection unit SEL (selected image) was erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display on the display means). However, even if the next period in which the production (group notice) is developed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the production (group notice) is not developed and the image display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is performed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 develops the effect (group notice), and if it is won, the effect (group notice) is developed, whereas if it is lost, the effect (group notice) is performed. Group notice) will not be deployed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group notice) instead of the sub control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), this look-ahead effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (the establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, is performed. Then, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means). Was there. However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the look-ahead effect is not performed and the selection unit SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It may be continued. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 performs the look-ahead effect, and if the sub-control board 90 is won, the look-ahead effect is performed, whereas if the sub-control board 90 is lost, the look-ahead effect is not performed. The image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery for whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the hold sequence is based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the effect of the hold sequence, which is a special image, is performed. When the effect of is performed, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is blocked from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display means). It was (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the effect of the hold sequence is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect of the hold sequence is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection unit SEL (selected image) The display to may continue. In this case, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-control board 90 produces the hold-ream effect, and if it is won, the hold-ream effect is produced, whereas if it is lost, the hold-relay effect is not performed. .. It should be noted that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the effect of the hold sequence instead of the sub control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 (H), the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It was (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK that imitates a car as a special image, a cut-in notice (additional) such as a full-body image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character or item, and a group image of multiple characters It may be an image inserted as an effect). Further, when the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach effect, the eye-catching image is set as a special image, so that the display of the special image is prioritized. The selection unit SEL may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the character of the manufacturer that produces the game machine 1 appears on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of this manufacturer is set as a special image, the display of the character of the manufacturer is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL is the image display device. It may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of 7.

[Modification 3]
In the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J), if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the look-ahead effect is performed. Before it is performed, the effect mode can be selected during the fluctuation, whereas when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the change, and further, the look-ahead effect cannot be selected. Even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reserved image 9A where the effect was performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol starts to change, the player However, even if the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the effect mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A on which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the image is missing. The effect mode may not be selected only during the period until the final display is displayed, and even if the look-ahead effect is performed during the change during the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. The effect mode may be selected during the period until the hold image 9A on which the reading effect is performed moves to the right as the hold digestion image 9C and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

[Modification example 4]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect A of FIG. 95 and the effect mode selection display prevention effect B of FIG. 96, the already selected effect mode is continued at the interval, so that the next decorative symbol is started to change. Unless it was, the production mode could not be selected. However, the effect mode may be selected only at the interval in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the predetermined effect among the plurality of types of reach effects. As a predetermined effect, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that is advantageous to the player will occur, and after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the so-called normal reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is not possible to select the effect mode at the interval.

[Modification 5]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), the first surface of the hold continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped toward the front (player side). If it is displayed, the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, although it is not possible to tell the type of hit. I was able to tell that it was, but I could not tell up to the number of jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold. For example, when there are three jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure hold, the first of the hold series image HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (player side). "+3" may be displayed on the right side of the surface, or the reserved continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 may be displayed by arranging three horizontally, three vertically, or three diagonally. May be good.

[Modification 6]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a video is a video explaining the progress of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be a video by 3D CG, a video by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the effect mode selection display prevention effect C of FIG. 97, an image display of a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural effect modes). The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) was executed during the jackpot effect (effect of the winning game). However, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the production in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect (or during the production in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect). It may be. In this case, as for the second effect of displaying the effect of the hold ream, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means), in addition to the big hit effect, during the effect in the small hit game (or instead of the big hit effect). It may be executed during the production in the winning game).

[Modification 8]
The selected display blocking effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95, the selected display blocking effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, and the selected display blocking effect C of the effect mode of FIG. 97 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
A first effect of displaying a selected image capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect modes on the display means, and
At least one of the second effect of displaying the special image on the display means can be executed.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect and display the special image on the display means by the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
The first effect and the second effect can be performed in a specific period.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2.
Equipped with multiple operating means that can be operated by the player
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3.
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4.
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one selected effect mode is arranged on the foremost side.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5.
The predetermined condition includes a condition suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. This game ball image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the game ball image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Game ball image production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG is changed. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG is changed. Here, it is assumed that the upper surface of green is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the pressing promotion effect, the button image BG whose upper surface color has changed due to the color change effect is displayed. In addition, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that it is a fluctuation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99C, the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Game ball image production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the hold stock effect is executed. The hold stock effect is an effect that maximizes the number of stored second special figure reservations to "4" in the fluctuation. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "Right-handed to save the hold" is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. The panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters of "CHANGE" are changed to "BIG CHANCE".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is an over prize. Further, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters "BIG CHANCE" have been changed to "Gekiatsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect of notifying that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background for confirming the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form so-called doublets. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game ball image production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an effect using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), and a big hit. It suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the game (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the production using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG collides with the collision target (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), and the collision target. By changing the color of, the degree of expectation of transition to the jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by producing the color change due to the collision of the game ball image UG.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) imitating the effect button 63 and a panel image PG on which characters are displayed are adopted as collision targets of the game ball image UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a unified effect on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is adopted as the collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98 (C) and 98 (E)). , FIGS. 99 (C) (E), FIGS. 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if the game ball collision effect was executed by the game ball that entered the ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the game ball image production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the number of game balls represented in the game ball image UG is one, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over winning after the second special figure hold reaches the upper limit.

[Modification example 4]
The above is an example of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a jackpot, but it may be applied as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a high-accuracy or low-accuracy time-saving game.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It ’s a game machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image, which is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
In the game ball production, the game ball image is made to collide with the collision target, and the display color or the color development mode of the collision target is changed to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
The collision target is an image displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
The collision target is an accessory arranged in the game area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
The game ball effect is executed when the game ball enters a predetermined entry port.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5.
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6.
The advantageous game is a time-saving game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5.
The predetermined ball entry port is a start port, and is executed when the ball enters the start port after the hold memory due to the entry of the game ball into the start port reaches the upper limit.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, specific end face effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also viewed in the drawing. Some are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

The specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 are included. Change the aspect.

Here, first, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is temporarily stopped at the number "8", the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is rotated by the number "8" (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease toward the rear while rotating from the upper side to the lower side, this time, another rotation (for example, from the right side to the left side of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image) The left decorative symbol 8L is finally temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), as it switches to (rotating) and rotates while approaching forward and gradually increasing in size. The display mode is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R and the rotation is stopped. This is done in order to largely display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side middle decoration symbol 8CL and the left side of the right side middle decoration design 8CR obtained by dividing the middle decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right, as will be described later.

After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right with a vertical line (center line) passing through the upper midpoint and the lower midpoint of the stereoscopic image 8C as a boundary, and the left intermediate decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image is divided. It is divided into 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR of the stereoscopic image, and as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are displayed in a Kannon opening manner. Here, a stereoscopic image in which the right end face of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the open side end face, which is the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the left end face of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is the open side end face. It becomes the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative symbol 8CR.

The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is formed as colored opaque, but when the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL and the right intermediate decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL has a specific end surface 8CLa and the right side. It is represented in such a manner that the specific end face 8CRa of the intermediate decorative pattern 8CR has transparency. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed as a transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the intermediate decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, showing the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are gradually opened in the manner of opening the sword, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size from each other do not change. It has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR have just been opened in the manner of double doors, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparency of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR It is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent, but the left middle decorative symbol As the 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR become larger. , A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR.

When the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are wide open in the manner of double doors, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is the character body CRB. The transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR becomes large until the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 101 (E), as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the transparent end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward from the stationary state to a position closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes inclined.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is colored and opaque as "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and moves backward (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is done in order to largely display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right, as will be described later.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and is divided into two stereoscopic image character string images in which "OA" is the left side character string image LGL and "RO" is the right side character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR are displayed in a Kannon opening mode. Here, the right end face of the character "A" which is the right end face of the left side character string image LGL is a specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image which is the open side end face, and the left side of the right side character string image LGR. The left end face of the letter "R" which is the end face is the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image whose open side end face is.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon-opening manner, the left side character string image LGL has a specific end face LGLa and the right side. It is represented in a mode in which the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR has transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon opening mode, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed as a transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR.

Here, two character strings CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two character strings CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Yes, even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in the manner of a Kannon opening, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of each other do not change. It has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR have just been opened in the manner of Kannon opening, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent, the left character string image As the LGL and the right-hand character string image LGR are opened in a Kannon-opening manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR become larger. , A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened wide in a Kannon opening mode, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the transparent region of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL is the character body CRB. The transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR becomes large enough to be able to visually recognize the existence of the character CRA.

Following FIG. 102 (G), as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent end surface LGRa of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two character body CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character strings CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face effect C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effects. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is displayed as a stop. Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "9" temporarily stops), and the middle decoration. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The image display device 7 advances (moves) downward from the stationary state to a position closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advanced position (directed position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle is clockwise from the horizontal state. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes inclined.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is colored and opaque as "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as the “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the colors may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and moves backward (moves) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image). When the display mode is set to gradually decrease in distance, this time, the display mode is switched to another rotation (for example, the rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the image gradually approaches forward while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103 (E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. It becomes a display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the display mode in which the front surface of the left side character string image LGL obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and close is displayed in a large size. It is done in.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and is divided into character string images of two stereoscopic images in which "OA" is the left side character string image LGL and "RO" is the right side character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left character string image LGL is a display mode that rotates forward about the vertical direction of the right side of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side of the right side character string image LGR is the right side. The display mode rotates forward about the vertical direction on the left side of the character string image LGR. Here, the surface of the left side character string image LGL described as "OA" immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)) is divided into "left character string". It is called "the front surface of the image LGL", and the surface of the right character string image LGR described as "RO" immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)) is divided. In, it is called "the front of the right character string image LGR".

As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other. The display mode is such that the column image LGR is rotated (hereinafter, referred to as "a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other and overlap each other").

As a result, the right end face of the character "A", which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, becomes the closed side end face, and the left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, becomes the open side end face. Further, the left end face of the character "R" which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR is the closed side end face, and the right end face of the character "O" which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR is the open side end face.

The left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is the open side end face, and here is the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a three-dimensional image, and the right side character string image LGR. The right end face of the character "O" which is the right end face is an open side end face, and here is a specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image.

The character string image LG is formed as colored opaque, but when the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, the left character string image LGL is specified. The end face LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a manner having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the display mode is such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is transparent to the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. Area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR can be visually recognized.

Here, two character strings CRA and CRB are used as "predetermined images", and the two character strings CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the game machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other. The positions of the two character strings CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size from each other do not change. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR have just been closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other. The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become large, a part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the right side character string image LGR can be visually recognized. A part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGRa of.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, FIG. 103 (G) As shown in, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to be able to visually recognize the existence of the character body CRB, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Increases to a state in which the presence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103 (G), as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent end surface LGRa of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the action effect by the two character body CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character strings CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (here, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player, whereas the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "9" and the same symbols (here, the number "9") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images. When displaying the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided are represented in a mode of having transparency, and the middle left side. Through the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, the first effect of making the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined image) visible can be executed. According to this configuration, two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are formed through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR, which are represented in a transparent manner. Since it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect that can be visually recognized, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL The two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right side character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and the same is true.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, it is represented by a mode having transparency. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided so that the region between the specific end face 8CLa of the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right intermediate decorative symbol 8CR represented in a transparent manner is large. The left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-door manner. According to this configuration, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-door manner, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is represented in a transparent manner. And the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented in a transparent manner, and the area where the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized is increased. Therefore, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-folded manner to have transparency. The area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL represented by the aspect and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR represented by the transparent aspect becomes large, and the two character body CRA, The area where the CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be increased, and the same is true.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR. The specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decoration symbol 8CL represented by the transparent aspect and the right middle decoration represented by the transparent aspect by being rotated in a display mode in which the characters face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other. The area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR is increased, and the area where the two character strings CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be increased, which is the same.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the number “8” which is the intermediate decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is before the first effect. It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying the size of the image on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, before the first effect, the size of the number "8", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a large size, so that the decorative symbol 8CL is displayed. Before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are represented in a manner having transparency, the player with respect to the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR. Since it can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), before the first effect, the mode of the Kannon opening by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR is greatly changed to the image display device 7 ( By being able to be displayed on the display means), the specific end surface of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface of the left character string image LGL are represented in a manner in which the specific end surface LGRa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), before the first effect, the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right side character string image LGR face each other and are closed is greatly increased. By being able to be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the left character string before and after the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. It can contribute to directing the line of sight of the player to the specific end surface LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and is similar.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number "8" which is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is The number "8", which is the interior decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed smaller by moving away from the depth direction, and then the number "8", which is the interior decoration symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed by moving closer to the front. The size of "8" is displayed large. According to this configuration, the mode of the double door opening by the right side of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR can be displayed in a large size, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), the mode of the double door opening by the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large size, which is the same.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 (E), the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed can be displayed in a large size, which is the same. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image is on the left side. It is divided into a plurality of middle decorative symbols 8CL and a right middle decorative symbol 8CR, and the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR (in each divided stereoscopic image). It is possible to perform an effect in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end face). According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image into a plurality of three-dimensional images, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and as a result, the specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increase. Since it is possible to give the player many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined image) through the specific end face in the image, the player can be visually entertained and enjoyed. It can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 102 (E) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIGS. 103 (E) to 103 (G), the character string image LG is "OA". As a result of being divided into two character string images in which the left side character string image LGL and "RO" are the right side character string image LGR, as the number of stereoscopic images increases, the specific end faces in each divided stereoscopic image also increase. This is the same because it is possible to give the player many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces in each of the three-dimensional images thus increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (D) of the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, the advance (front surface) of the image display device 7 (display means) A second movable accessory 15 (movable member) that can be moved to a position (predetermined position) is provided, and when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) has a reach formed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of reach effects, a third effect that operates (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advance position (predetermined position) can be executed. In the second production, the character string image LG of the colored opaque stereoscopic image in which the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is "OARO" is displayed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is triggered by this. Since the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image called "OARO", the second movable accessory 15 (movable) A mode in which the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the member) is shaken off from the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform a novel production that becomes, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are defined as transparent regions, and the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102. In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are defined as transparent regions. However, the specific end faces 8CLa, 8CRa in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end faces LGLa, LGRa in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face LGLa in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103. , LGRa may have translucency as long as it has translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end face is represented in a mode having translucency such as frosted glass, and the specific end face gradually becomes a transparent region from a blurred mode in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end face. As the transparency increases, the predetermined image may be made easier to see through the specific end face. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, two character body CRAs are used as predetermined images through the specific end faces of the stereoscopic image. , CRB could be visually recognized, and it was a still image in which two character bodies CRA and CRB faced each other with a sword. However, a moving image may be used instead of the still image. The moving image may be, for example, explaining the flow until two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with a sword, may be a moving image by 3D CG, may be a moving image by animation, or may be a moving image of a movie. It may be one scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into a plurality of stereoscopic images of three or more. In this way, as the number of stereoscopic images increases due to the division, the specific end faces in each stereoscopic image also increase, and as a result, there are many opportunities to visually recognize the predetermined image through the transparent specific end faces. It can be given to the player.

[Modification example 4]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are gradually opened in a manner of opening the Kannon, and in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. The character string image LGR is gradually opened in a Kannon opening mode, and in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other and overlap. The left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR were gradually closed so as to become. However, the stereoscopic image may be rotated in the same direction or may be rotated in different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right rotation mode and a left rotation mode) without the double door opening mode. It may be rotated forward, backward, etc.), or it may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left intermediate decorative symbol 8CL may be forward-rotated, while the right intermediate decorative symbol 8CR may be rotated backward. Or, the left middle decorative symbol 8CL is rotated backward, while the right middle decorative symbol 8CR is rotated clockwise. Further, in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right rotation mode and a left rotation mode), regardless of the mode of opening the Kannon. A mode of forward rotation, a mode of backward rotation, etc.) may be used, or the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated backward, for example, as rotations in different directions. Or the mode in which the left character string image LGL is rotated backward while the mode in which the right character string image LGR is rotated clockwise. Further, in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without closing the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. (For example, a mode of rotating clockwise, a mode of rotating counterclockwise, a mode of rotating forward, a mode of rotating backward, etc.) may be used, or as rotations in different directions, for example, a mode of rotating the left character string image LGL forward. On the other hand, the right character string image LGR is backflip, or the left side character string image LGL is backflip, whereas the right side character string image LGR is clockwise rotation.

[Modification 5]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the effect of the game machine 1 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image. It showed the world view of. However, it may suggest the development destination of the reach production. Since there are multiple types of development destinations for reach production, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur by the development destination that can be visually recognized through a specific end face, and a predetermined image and a jackpot at the development destination. It can also contribute to the player himself / herself finding a relationship with the degree of expectation that the game will occur.

[Modification 6]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the world view of the effect of the game machine 1 is shown as a predetermined image. there were. As an indicator of the world view of the production, for example, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB having a sword, an item such as a sword or a shield, a vehicle, or two character bodies may be used. It may be expressed by two kanji characters such as the character "crash", the character "Ranbu", and the character "Musou" indicating the action by CRA and CRB.

[Modification 7]
The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103 may not include a part of the described effects, and others. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images.
When a stereoscopic image is displayed on the display means, the specific end face in the stereoscopic image is represented in a transparent manner, and the first effect of making the predetermined image visible through the specific end face can be executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the region of the specific end face becomes large.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2.
Prior to the first effect, a second effect of displaying the size of the stereoscopic image on the display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3.
In the second effect, the stereoscopic image is displayed in a smaller size by moving away from it in the depth direction, and then by approaching in the front direction, the size of the stereoscopic image is increased. Is displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4.
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the effect that the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end face in each of the divided stereoscopic images can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4.
A movable member that can be moved to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means is provided.
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position.
In the second effect, the stereoscopic image in which the movable member is stereoscopically expressed is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the combined effects A to C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In FIGS. 104 to 106, decorative symbols and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable accessories 15 are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The combined effect of the movable accessory can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the combined effect of the movable accessory, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of the movable accessory, the game board 2 is set. The position, inclination and light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided can be changed, and the position, inclination and light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 can be changed. Light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter, "light emission of the frame lamp 66"). "Aspect") is changed.

It should be noted that the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (plural), and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L may be a multicolor emission mode. The right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (multiple LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R can be set to a multicolor emission mode. it can. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (plurality are provided), and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be set to the mode of multicolor light emission, and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (plural). The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor light emitting mode.

Here, first, the union effect A of the movable accessory will be described, and then the union effect B of the movable accessory and the union effect C of the movable accessory will be described in order.

[Combining production of movable characters A]
First, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect A of the movable accessory. In the combined effect A of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position (home) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (light emission for the left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and FIG. 104 ( As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of laughing with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of squinting and smiling. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (C) and 104 (D), the united accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will cover the upper part. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode for turning off the light. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory 15 when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The second light emitting mode for the movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory again, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp. The light emitting mode of 66 is controlled again from the light emitting mode for turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is different from each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. Or, it is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) While retreating (moving) from the central advance position toward the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward from the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The display screen of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of 7a, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R changes from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). It is controlled to a light emitting mode that turns off. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L proceeds, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The data may be provided individually and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combining production of movable characters B]
Next, the combined effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect B of the movable accessory. In the combined effect B of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position (home) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in a light emitting mode in which the movable accessory 14R on the right side is turned off while advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side toward the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emitting mode in which the light is extinguished, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L for the left movable accessory. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is for the left movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the light emitting mode, and the region formed in the ring becomes a circular region (hereinafter, referred to as “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of laughing with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of squinting and smiling. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) closer to the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it will be in a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will cover the upper part. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained in the light emitting mode of turning off, and both the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are turned off. Is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory 15 when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, which will be described later. The light emitting mode is different from that of the mode).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and 105 (E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory again. The light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emitting mode of turning off the light to the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R of the right movable accessory 14R, and is controlled from the light emitting state of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and is movable on the left side. The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L becomes the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, and the second movable accessory. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The light emitting mode is the same as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is different from each other.

Then, the united accessory performs a "nodding (like a person's face bowing)" action of tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and returning to the original side. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, stops, and is originally horizontal. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. Or, it is controlled to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emitting mode to turn off.

Subsequently, in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other, the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) While retreating (moving) from the central advance position toward the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward from the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The accessory 14R advances in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed from the position toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (left movable accessory). The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory and the light emitting mode for turning off the light. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). It is controlled from a different light emitting mode) to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L proceeds, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66. Proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The data may be provided individually and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combining production of movable characters C]
Next, the combined effect C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect C of the movable accessory. In the combined effect C of the movable accessory, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the left movable accessory 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory, and the retracted position (home) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While advancing (moving) from the position) toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R emits light for the right movable accessory (light emission for the left movable accessory). In a light emitting mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the accessory 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of laughing with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of squinting and smiling. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and 106 (D), the united accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original "nodding (person)". The face is bowing) ”. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, an image expressing emotions is also displayed according to the movement in which the united accessory tilts toward the front side (player side) and returns to the original side. The display mode is such that the facial expression of the combined accessory is also changed three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is an image display device in a light emitting mode for the left movable accessory in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. The right movable accessory 14R moves to the right while retreating (moving) from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The retracted position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the left movable accessory 14L displays the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode for turning off, and the right side is movable. The display screen of the image display device 7 from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of 7a, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R changes from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled so that the light is turned off. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emitting mode is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled to.

As described above, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). Along with this, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retracts, and returns to the home position). In conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L proceeds according to the light emitting pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L defined in the time series, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is the right movable mode defined in the time series. The process proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (in the period until the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable accessory 14R when the right movable accessory 14R is operated. The data may be provided individually and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

Further, in the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104 and the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is the image display device 7. The clock advances (moves) downward from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) to a position closer to the center (advance position (directing position)) of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the direction and stopped, and then the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. ) Rotates and stops, returning to the original horizontal state, and retreating (moving) upward from the advance position (directing position) to the retracted position (home position), whereas the movable accessory shown in FIG. 106 There is no effect that the second movable accessory 15 appears on the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the combined effect C of. This is the degree of expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur when the decorative symbol is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). This is because the union effect A is the highest, followed by the union effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the union effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106 is set to the lowest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the combined effect of the movable accessory is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (many). A front frame 53 provided with an LED)) capable of emitting color light, and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame 53, and various images can be displayed. The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 that can be combined by moving to the traveling position (predetermined position) in front of the displayable image display device 7 (display means) and the image display device 7 (display means). And the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are provided on the game board 2, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side of the first movable accessory 14 are provided. The movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) is provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), respectively, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14L. When the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the 1 movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. Of the members), the light emitting mode and the front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the frame 53 is the same as the light emitting mode. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can move to the advance position and can be combined. As a result, the player can be visually entertained, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 can be enjoyed. The light emitting mode of the LED) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) are the same as the light emitting mode. It can be visually entertaining and can improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 When the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. ), A plurality of LEDs () provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 (other movable members excluding the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14). Second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)) The light emitting mode is different from that of the above. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advance position and are united. It is possible to visually entertain the player, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting light is different from the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. By adopting the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 Right side of movable accessory 14 A part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left side of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members). A second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) that can be moved so as to cover one or both of a part of the movable accessory 14L (another movable member) is provided. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. Since the object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interests. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of FIG. 104 (E) to FIG. 104 (F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, a plurality of movable accessories 15 (non-union movable members) are connected. A plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: multicolor light emitting) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) are provided. When the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the light emitting mode of the LED) can be the first movable accessory. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the object 14 and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting light and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolored light)) provided on the front frame 53. It is designed to be. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are newly separated from the second movable accessory. An object 15 (non-union movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolored light) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-union movable member) emit light. The embodiment is a plurality of LEDs (first movable accessory 14) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left movable accessory 14L (other movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. 2. Light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multiple colors)). Since the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting) provided in the front frame 53. Means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) and a second movable accessory 15 provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14. The plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multiple colors. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Since the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 can emit light in multiple colors, the player can visually emit light. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)), the left side of the first movable accessory 14. The movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before displaying the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)). , The left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advance position and are combined to have an impact on the player. It is possible to provide a certain effect and visually entertain the player, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player is During the period from the generation to the end (that is, during the jackpot production), the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 It can be united. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 during the period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state (big hit effect) to the end (during the jackpot effect). By moving the movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) on the right side of the above to the advanced position and combining them, it is possible to provide the player with an impactful effect and visually entertain the player. It can be done and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the combined effect of the movable accessory.
[Modification 1]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 The right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the accessory 14 moved to the advanced position and was united. However, any one of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 or all the movable members move to the advance position. You may return to the evacuation position (home position) and move to the advance position again, or reciprocate between the evacuation position (home position) and the advance position, and as a result, you may perform a combination effect of movable accessories that do not combine. .. Also in this case, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) has the same light emitting mode, and the right movable accessory 14R (specific) of the first movable accessory 14 A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the movable member) and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The second light emitting means: the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the LED) capable of emitting multiple colors. Further, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, resulting in a result. Even if the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) newly appears during the combined production of the movable accessory that does not combine with the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member). The light emitting modes of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory. The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the object 14 and the frame provided on the front frame 53. The light emitting mode is different from that of the lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)).

[Modification 2]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the left movable accessory 14L and the first movable of the first movable accessory 14 Two movable accessories, the right movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14, were moved to the advance position and merged. However, there may be a mode in which three or more movable accessories move to the advance position and are united. In this case, the first movable accessory 14 has a specific movable accessory that has the same emission mode as that of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)). The right movable accessory 14R may be used, or another movable accessory different from the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 may be used, or a movable accessory selected from all the movable accessories may be used. It may be a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left movable accessory 14L and the first movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 that operate on the combined effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106. When the right movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member that hides the existence of the left movable accessory 14L and the presence of the right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Even if the right side decorative member to be hidden is provided on the game board 2 and the left side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the right side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Good. In this case, when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are each positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), the first movable accessory 14 A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even if the left decorative member and the right decorative member are respectively mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs, the left decorative member and the right decorative member can emit light. For example, the light emitting mode of the left decorative member, the light emitting mode of one or both of the right decorative members, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are the same. It can be an embodiment.

[Modification example 4]
In the combination effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104, the combination effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combination effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106, the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable) of the first movable accessory 14 is used. Light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the member). The light emitting mode according to the LED)) was the same as the light emitting mode. However, the light emitting mode and the front frame 53 of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolored light) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening has the same light emitting mode, a plurality of frames provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolored light) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are different from each other. Alternatively, the light emitting mode and the front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the frame 53 has a different light emitting mode, the plurality of light emitting modes provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are the same light emitting mode. It may be.

[Modification 5]
In the combination effect A of the movable accessory of FIG. 104, the combination effect B of the movable accessory of FIG. 105, and the combination effect C of the movable accessory of FIG. 106, the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R is formed, the combined accessory moves from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side). He was doing a "nodding" (like a person's face bowing) action of tilting and then returning. However, the united accessory may perform a "human face turning left and right" operation in which the left side and the right side are rotated toward the front side (player side) and returned to the original side. .. In this case, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D has an image in which the eyes are crossed (batten) as an image expressing emotions (see, for example, FIG. 54), which is sad. It may be an image expressing emotions.

[Modification 6]
As a degree of expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) will occur when the decorative symbol is executed during the variation effect (for example, the period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation) Was the highest, followed by the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106 was set to the lowest. However, in the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which the player is given a profit by combining the movable accessory A in FIG. 104, the movable accessory united effect B in FIG. 105, and the movable accessory united effect C in FIG. 106. It may be executed as a production. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the player, or may be executed based on the operation of the sword member 64 (the operation of pushing downward) by the player. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 by the player.

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R are completely different light emitting modes, and further, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable accessory. The light emitting mode is exactly the same as that of the object 14R for the right movable accessory, which is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, during the period until the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R operate, advance toward the advance position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory are returned. When the 14R is interlocked with the same light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is different from the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are interlocked to form the same light emitting mode, for example, the frame lamp 66 lights up in red, blinks, or lights up in gradation, while the frame lamp 66 goes out. Alternatively, the light emitting mode is different from that of the left movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation.

[Modification 8]
In the combined effect A of the movable accessory in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable accessory in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable accessory in FIG. 106, a part of the described effects may not be provided. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
The front frame provided with the first light emitting means and
A display means visually recognizable through the opening formed in the front frame, and
A gaming machine including a plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and combined.
A second light emitting means is provided for each of the plurality of movable members.
When the plurality of movable members are united, a light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame. Has the same light emission mode,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members other than the specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the first light emitting mode provided on the front frame. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the light emitting means of 1.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2.
A non-combined movable member that is movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being combined with the plurality of movable members.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3.
A third light emitting means is provided on the non-union movable member.
In the light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-union movable member, when the plurality of movable members are united, the second light emission provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the means and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means, and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of emitting multiple colors.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
The plurality of movable members can be combined before displaying the occurrence of the effect of the winning game on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5.
The plurality of movable members can be combined in a period from the occurrence of the production of the winning game to the end.
A game machine characterized by that.

11. Operation of First Movable Accessory 14 in Other Embodiments When the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182, which will be described later, are executed, the configuration of the first movable accessory 14 is different from that of FIGS. 1, 49 to 58. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 when the production of FIGS. 175 to 182 is executed will be described. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment for executing the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110.

FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a third aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment includes a left fixed accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left fixed accessory 14L is not configured to be movable, and is stationary so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. Half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, respectively. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. The right movable accessory 14R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). When the right movable accessory 14R is in the retracted position, all of them are located on the back side of other members, and all of them are in a state where it is difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 107, in the left fixed accessory 14L, a pair of movable members 14LP are housed at the tip of an arc-shaped left decorative portion. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the pair of movable members 14LP are housed in the left decorative portion (retracted state). In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 107 is also referred to as a first aspect of the movable accessory 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable member 14LP is located on the back side of the left decorative portion at the time of storage and is difficult to see, and protrudes to the right as shown in FIG. In FIG. 108, the advance position (deployment position) in which the pair of movable members 14LP protrude to the right in parallel with each other is shown. In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 108 is also referred to as a second aspect of the movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 109, with the pair of movable members 14LP protruding from the tip of the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R advances and moves to the left, so that the pair of movable members 14LP move to the right. In contact with the object 14R, one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed as a whole (third aspect). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. Further, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapped and combined state. The state of FIG. 110 is also referred to as a fourth aspect of the movable accessory 14.

12. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The hold number interlocking image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114. This hold number interlocking image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold number interlocking image display effect, and the hold number reaches a predetermined number, The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Image display effect linked to the number of holds]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect A. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning a prize during a specific fluctuation. In the image display effect A linked to the number of holds, first, as shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and 111 (B), the hold is exhausted at the same time as the determination of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 111 (A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the loose stitch “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (hold digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A (holding number 2) corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In FIG. 111B, by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 111 (B) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol to make a total of two is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is three in total is shown by winning the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears during a specific fluctuation when a predetermined time elapses after the display. FIG. 111 (F) further shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol, resulting in a total of four. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed for a certain period only when the hold number is 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is other than that. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. That is, the specific fluctuation ends. After that, FIGS. 112 (H) to 112 (J), which will be described later, are executed.

FIG. 111 (H) shows a state in which the first special symbol has not been won after the start of the specific fluctuation shown in FIG. 111 (B). That is, the decorative design has stopped being fixed after a predetermined time has passed after the specific fluctuation. In this way, even if the fluctuation is specific, if the number of holds does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the number of holds suggestion image HSG.

As shown in FIG. 111 (C), FIG. 111 (I) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added after a specific fluctuation to bring the total to 2, and then the first special symbol is not won. There is. That is, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed after a specific fluctuation, and the decorative symbol has stopped being fixed. In this way, even if the fluctuation is specific, if the number of holds does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the number of holds suggestion image HSG.

As shown in FIG. 111 (E), FIG. 111 (J) shows a state in which the first special symbol has not been won after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. That is, after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed and the decorative symbol has stopped being fixed. As described above, in a specific variation, after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed once, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without being displayed again.

[Image display effect linked to the number of holds]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect B. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning a prize during a specific fluctuation. FIGS. 112 (A) to 112 (D) of the hold number interlocking image display effect B are the same as FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (D) of the hold number interlocking image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) and 112 (B), the hold is digested with the stoppage of the decorative symbol, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the random number “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (hold digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A (holding number 2) corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In FIG. 112 (B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 112 (B) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol to make a total of two is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is three in total is shown by winning the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. The display of the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears after a lapse of a predetermined time.

After that, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in a specific fluctuation, and the next fluctuation is started. FIG. 112 (E) illustrates the state of a particular variation during the next variation. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (2 hold numbers) are displayed. FIG. 112 (F) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol during this fluctuation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even though the hold number is 3. That is, in the next variation of the specific variation, the pending number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if a predetermined condition (the pending number becomes 3) is satisfied for the reserved number. In other words, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific fluctuation. As a result, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the next variation of the specific variation. After that, the next fluctuation is further started. FIG. 112 (H) illustrates the state during the next next variation of a particular variation. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (2 hold numbers) are displayed. FIG. 112 (I) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol during this fluctuation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even though the hold number is 3. That is, in the next variation following the specific variation, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if a predetermined condition (the hold number becomes 3) is satisfied for the hold number. In other words, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific fluctuation. As a result, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the next variation following the specific variation.

[Image display effect linked to the number of holds]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect C. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning a prize during a specific fluctuation. FIG. 113 (A) of the hold number interlocking image display effect C is the same as FIG. 111 (A) of the hold number interlocking image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the hold is exhausted at the same time as the determination of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the random number “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (hold digestion). In addition, two hold icons 9A (holding number 2) corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In FIG. 113 (B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the earlier (right side) hold icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the hold icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two hold icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 113 (B) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to the "specific fluctuation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific fluctuation may be executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). It may be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and the countdown is started after the display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), a state in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol to make a total of two is shown. The timer image TM1 continues the countdown and is shown here as "8 seconds left". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a state in which the number of hold icons 9A is a total of three is further shown by winning the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113 (E) and 113 (F), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at a specific variation, and the next variation is started. Since FIG. 113 (G) is the same as FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of the held number interlocking image display effect B, the state during the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation will be omitted.

In FIGS. 113 (H) to 113 (J), as shown in FIG. 113 (C), one hold icon 9A is added after a specific change to make a total of 2, and then the first special symbol is won. It shows the state that there was no. That is, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses after a specific fluctuation, the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", and then the timer image TM1 disappears and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. In this way, even if the fluctuation is specific, if the number of holds does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped without displaying the number of holds suggestion image HSG.

[Image display effect linked to the number of holds]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the hold number interlocking image display effect D. The hold number interlocking image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning a prize during a specific fluctuation. In FIG. 114 (A) of the image display effect D linked to the number of pending numbers, it is notified that the time saving game will be started after the big hit game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is one, and the normal state is returned after one lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the hold number interlocking image display effect D, since the hold icon is not displayed, the current hold number is shown at the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114 (A), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 1 by right-handed, and becomes 0 at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol in FIG. 114 (B).

In FIG. 114 (B), one hold of the second special symbol is consumed, the rest becomes 0, and the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 114 (B) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. Here, the "specific variation" refers to the variation of the first second special symbol that is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is one of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is not included in the number of time reductions. The number of time reductions can be any number. Further, not only the second special symbol lottery but also the first special symbol lottery may be included in the time saving count. An image showing whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to a specific fluctuation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and the countdown is started after the display. In FIG. 114 (B), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 2 by continuing the right-handed strike.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the hold of the second special symbol is changed from 2 to 3 by continuing the right-handed strike. In conjunction with this, the hold number suggestion image HSG described as "3 hold now !!" is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies that fact when the hold number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is 2 or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Here, "5 seconds left" is shown. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 114 (D) and 114 (E), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789" in a specific fluctuation, and the number of reserved second special symbols is changed from 3 to 2. Then, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), "normal mode start !!" is displayed before the variable display. After that, a variable display is made.

In FIG. 114 (H), the timer image TM2 is displayed together with the fluctuation display during the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation. This timer image TM2 only represents the content of the timer "10 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed with "10 seconds left" without counting down. In this case, such an image is also referred to as a timer image. After the fixed stop, the number of pending numbers changes from 2 to 1, and the next fluctuation is started. At this time, the timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image only shows the contents of the timer "5 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time elapses without performing a countdown. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (J), the determination is stopped. The number of reserved second special symbols changes from 1 to 0. In FIGS. 114 (H) to 114 (J), the number of holds is a predetermined value (for example, 3) in each variation, as in FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of the image display effect B linked to the number of holds. Even if it exceeds, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image display effect linked to the number of pending numbers is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation, the holding number suggestion image HSG is displayed. And the second effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first effect is executed after the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, in the first effect, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the hold number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) of 2 or more. It is not displayed before the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 113, if the number of holds does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific fluctuation, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. According to this configuration, since the hold number suggestion image HSG may not be displayed, the impression when it is displayed can be increased. In this way, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest of the player by the novel production that has never existed before.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the timer image is displayed at the start of the specific fluctuation and the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the hold number suggestion is displayed. The image HSG disappears with the timer image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image showing the content suggesting that the hold number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3). is there. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved by a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which a predetermined image representing the number of pending images is suddenly displayed. ..
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed during the fluctuation executed after the specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented novel effect that the predetermined image does not appear even if the number of holds is predetermined in the next fluctuation, unexpectedly by the player. , It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the specific variation is executed in the time saving state, and the variation executed after the specific variation is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the image display effect linked to the number of holds.
[Modification 1]
The number of holdings on which the suggestion image HSG is displayed is not limited to 3, and can be any number. In addition, it is preferable that the number of holdings suggestive image HSG is a plurality of holdings. Further, the number of holdings in which the holding number suggestion image HSG is displayed may be a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of pending numbers is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content represented by the hold number suggestion image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, it may be "even now", "not yet", or "already full".

[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned timer image may represent the contents of the timer such as "10 seconds left" or "3:00". It is not always necessary to count down. For example, even in a mode in which "100 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the first fluctuation, and "10 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the next fluctuation, it is called a timer image.

[Modification example 4]
The configurations of the image display effects A to D linked to the number of pending numbers can be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
The first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the number of pending numbers reaches a predetermined number due to winning during a specific fluctuation, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first effect is executed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the first effect, the predetermined image is displayed when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the number of holdings reaches the predetermined number.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
If the number of holds does not reach the predetermined number during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image.
The timer image is displayed at the start of the specific fluctuation, and the display disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value.
When the predetermined image is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image disappears together with the timer image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The predetermined image is an image showing content suggesting that the number of holds has reached a predetermined number.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The predetermined image is not displayed during the variation performed after the particular variation.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The particular variation is performed in the time saving state, and the variation executed after the specific variation is executed in the normal state.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the holding number change interlocking effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. This hold number change interlocking effect can be executed after a big hit game or during a change effect of a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the hold number change interlocking effect, and the hold number is predetermined. When the change occurs, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Holding number change interlocking production A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect A. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is a variable display effect of the decorative symbol in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holds means that the number of holds increases by 3 or more during the specific effect, and is "predetermined". The "image" will be described as being an expectation suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. Here, whether or not this fluctuation corresponds to the "specific effect" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific effect may be a variation effect executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state to the normal state). It may be a variable effect that is executed when the state is changed. An image showing whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the hold is the hold of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 1 to 4 due to three winnings, when the "specific effect" is being executed. In addition, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 115 (C), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation as shown in FIG. 115 (D). Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 115 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. If the number of holds does not change in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 115 (A) to 115 (B), the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 115 (D), the expectation suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds after the display) after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 115 (F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 115 (I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 115 (J). The following variation shown in FIG. 115 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. It should be noted that the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only represents the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect B. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holds is the second special by winning the second special symbol during the specific effect. The number of reserved symbols is increased from 0 to 1, and the “predetermined image” is described as being an expectation suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIGS. 116 (A) and 116 (B), after the determination of the first special symbol is stopped, the hold icon corresponding to the next first special symbol is combined with the hold digestion. Shifts to the hold icon 9C, and the next fluctuation is started. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. Here, whether or not this fluctuation corresponds to the "specific effect" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific effect may be a variation effect executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state to the normal state). It may be a variable effect that is executed when the state is changed. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image showing whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the hold is the hold of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 116 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, the "specific effect" is executed. At that time, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". Then, after the confirmation stop shown in FIG. 116 (C), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next change in which the second special symbol lottery is performed as shown in FIG. 116 (D). Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 116 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. If there is no prize for the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 116 (B) to 116 (C), the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next fluctuation shown in FIG. 116 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the fluctuation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 116 (F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 116 (I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 116 (J). The following variation shown in FIG. 116 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. It should be noted that the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only represents the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect C. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holds is the second special by winning the second special symbol during the specific effect. The number of reserved symbols is increased from 0 to 1, and the “predetermined image” is described as being an expectation suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), it is notified that the time saving game starts after the big hit game. Specifically, "Time saving mode starts !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is one, and the normal state is returned after one lottery of the second special symbol. In FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B), a variable effect corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol obtained by winning a prize before the jackpot game is performed. This variable effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. That is, here, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state corresponds to the "specific effect". If a second special symbol is won by right-handed during this particular effect, the hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (B). During this variable effect (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, the "specific effect" is executed. At that time, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), after the fixed stop, the variation effect of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed.

In the next variation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the game state is the time saving state, and the variation effect due to the pending digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 117 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. If there is no prize for the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (C), the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 117 (D), the expectation suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 117 (F). In FIG. 117 (F), the second special symbol is won by right-handed, and the hold icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 117 (H), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. After that, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 117 (I), "normal mode start !!" is displayed, and the change of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 117 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbol. The following variation shown in FIG. 117 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. It should be noted that the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only represents the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the hold number change interlocking effect D. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the fluctuation started after the end of the specific effect. It is a production. Here, the "specific effect" is an effect when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holds is the effect of the second special symbol during the specific effect. The number of reserved second special symbols is increased from 0 to 1 by winning a prize, and the "predetermined image" will be described as an expectation suggestion image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the hold number change interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIGS. 118 (A) to 118 (C), it is notified that the time saving game starts after the big hit game. Specifically, "Time saving mode starts !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is one, and the normal state is returned after one lottery of the second special symbol. FIG. 118 (A) shows a state in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not held after the jackpot game. Here, the effect of waiting for the prize of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game corresponds to the "specific effect" in the claims. That is, here, the state in which the fluctuation is not performed in the time saving state or the display of "time saving mode start !!" corresponds to the "specific effect". If there is a prize for the second special symbol by right-handed during this specific effect, the hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (B). While this "time saving mode start !!" is displayed (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol. , When the "specific effect" is being executed, the number of holds has made a "predetermined change". After the fixed stop, the second special symbol is changed in the reduced working hours.

In the next variation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the game state is the time saving state, and the variation effect due to the pending digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next variation of the specific effect. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is described as "chance", and suggests the expectation degree of hit in the fluctuation. The following variation shown in FIG. 118 (D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. If there is no prize for the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (C), the expectation suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 118 (D), the expectation suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 118 (E), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of both the reduced expectation degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears after that, as shown in FIG. 118 (F). In FIG. 118 (F), the second special symbol is won by right-handed, and the hold icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 seconds left", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 118 (H). After that, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 118 (I), "normal mode start !!" is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 118 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbol. The following variation shown in FIG. 118 (J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. It should be noted that the timer image TM3 may be counted down, or only represents the contents of the timer "3 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time with "3 seconds left" without counting down. May be good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, the confirmation is stopped.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect linked to the change in the number of holds.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, when the number of holds changes by a predetermined value while the specific effect is being executed, the first method is started after the end of the specific effect. It is possible to execute the first effect in which a predetermined image (expectation suggestion image KSG or timer image TM1) is displayed in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which a timer image is always displayed when the number of holds changes by a predetermined value while a specific effect is being executed. It can be done and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation, and in the first fluctuation, after the first timer image TM1 disappears. , The second effect in which the second timer image TM2 is displayed during the same fluctuation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented novel effect that the timer image is always displayed twice with the same fluctuation, and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which the third timer image TM3 is displayed is executed. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest by the novel production that the timer image is always displayed even if the next fluctuation is made. be able to.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image (expectation degree suggestion image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation, and the size changes during the same fluctuation. According to this configuration, the expectation suggestion image KSG, which is always displayed in the first fluctuation, can visually entertain the player with an unprecedented novel effect that the size always changes. It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific effect is a variation effect of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first variation is the first special symbol. Or, it is a variation of the other of the second special symbol, and in the predetermined image, the number of holdings of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed by a predetermined value during the variation of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (Here, 0 → 1) is displayed in the fluctuation of the other symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the specific effect and the first variation are executed in the time saving state, and the second variation is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold number change interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is displayed as the predetermined image, but the predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, a character image, or an image showing a place where the game ball is aimed.

[Modification 2]
The specific effect of FIG. 117 is a variation effect of the first special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is the second special symbol during the variation of the first special symbol. When the number of holds is changed by a predetermined value (here, 0 → 1), it is assumed that it is displayed in the change of the second special symbol. However, in the specific effect of FIG. 117, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite to each other. That is, the specific effect is the variation effect of the second special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is the variation of the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol. When the number of holdings changes by a predetermined value (here, 0 → 1), it may be displayed in the change of the first special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image of the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to the digital display, and may represent the remaining period until the end point by a needle or an area. Further, the timer image does not necessarily have to move as long as it is an image representing the timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed a plurality of times and the remaining period until the end point is reduced each time it is displayed is also included in the timer image. Further, if the image clearly represents the timer, it is included in the timer image even if it is not moving.

[Modification example 4]
The expected degree suggestion image KSG was moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. However, the expectation suggestion image KSG may be large or may not be moved.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the hold number change interlocking effects A to D may be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
If the number of holds changes by a predetermined value while the specific effect is being executed, the first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in the first variation started after the end of the specific effect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The predetermined image is a first timer image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The first timer image is displayed at the start of the first variation,
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second effect in which the second timer image is displayed during the same variation can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3.
In the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which the third timer image is displayed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The predetermined image is displayed at the start of the first variation and changes in magnitude during the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The specific effect is a variable effect of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The first variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
The predetermined image is displayed in the fluctuation of the other symbol when the reserved number of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes in a predetermined manner during the fluctuation of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be done,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to claim 4.
The particular effect and the first variation are performed during the time saving state,
The second variation is performed under normal conditions.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold icon movement change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. This hold icon movement change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Hold icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each of them corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 119 (C) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four hold icons 9A do not move. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the start of the change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). In other words, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as at the time of the previous change. After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the four hold icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119 (D). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A becomes three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the next variation is initiated. The three hold icons 9A do not move when the next fluctuation begins. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the three hold icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119 (G). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (white) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A becomes two.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the hold icon 9C disappears when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the next variation is initiated. The two hold icons 9A do not move when the next fluctuation begins. That is, of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the two hold icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119 (J). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (black) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A becomes one.

[Hold icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect B. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each of them corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 120 (C) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is initiated, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (D). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display of the four hold icons 9A, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the right and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. The other three hold icons 9A do not move. As a result, the number of hold icons 9A becomes three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. The three hold icons 9A are not displayed when the next variation begins. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (G). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (H), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. The hold icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation begins. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, two hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (I). At this time, the two hold icons 9A are reduced by one from the time when they were displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. On the other hand, of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation corresponding to the hold icon 9A (white) on the far left is started.

[Hold icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect C. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each of them corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and one of the hold icons 9A (here, the third from the right) is held and changed. Specifically, the color of the hold icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation corresponding to this pending change has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 121 (D) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is initiated, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (E). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left as shown in FIG. 121 (F). To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping the other hold icons 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (H), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. The hold icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation begins. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (J), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. FIG. 121 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the hold icon movement change effect B, and then FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the hold icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Hold icon movement change effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect D. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. The four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each of them corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by the color. In FIG. 122 (A), the hold icon 9A is not yet in a state of suggesting the degree of expectation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and two of the hold icons 9A (here, the rightmost and the third from the right) are held and changed. Specifically, one of the colors of the hold icon 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation corresponding to this pending change has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The four hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the next variation is initiated. The variation shown in FIG. 122 (D) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is initiated, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (E). At this time, the four hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern). After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left as shown in FIG. 122 (F). To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping the other hold icons 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. The hold icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation begins. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as those displayed at the time of the previous fluctuation. That is, of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) does not move at the time of the current change. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. FIG. 122 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the hold icon movement change effect B, and then FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the hold icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (C) to 119 (E), a first effect in which a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during a specific fluctuation is executed. It is possible, and each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each fluctuation after the specific fluctuation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit in each fluctuation, and among the plurality of predetermined images, a specific The predetermined image corresponding to the fluctuation can perform a second effect of starting the predetermined movement after the start of the specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect of shifting after the start of fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), in the first effect, a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed side by side in a row. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect of the hold icon that shifts and moves after the start of fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the predetermined image (holding icon 9C) suggests the degree of expectation by the color. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect of the hold icon that shifts and moves after the start of fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during the fluctuation before the specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (F) to (G) and 122 (F) to (G), in the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is different. Moves to a position that overlaps the predetermined image of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (F), 120 (G), 121 (I), and 122 (I), a plurality of predetermined variations are performed during the next variation of the specific variation. It is possible to execute a third effect in which a predetermined image other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is displayed among the images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that four hold icons 9A as predetermined images are displayed side by side at the time of a specific change. However, the hold icon 9A as a predetermined image does not necessarily have to be configured to be able to display four as long as it is configured to be able to display a plurality (two or more) at a specific fluctuation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol is illustrated as a predetermined image in which each corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation and suggests the degree of expectation of a hit in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. The predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol, or may be another image. That is, any image that corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation and suggests the degree of expectation of hit in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation can be used as a predetermined image.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the hold icon movement change effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
It is possible to perform a first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed during a specific fluctuation.
Each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit in each variation.
Among the plurality of predetermined images, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation can execute a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed side by side in a row.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The predetermined image suggests the degree of expectation by color.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
During the variation prior to the particular variation, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation moves to a position overlapping with another predetermined image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
During the next variation of the specific variation, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a predetermined image other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is displayed among the plurality of predetermined images.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the variable medium-order mode start display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. This variable intermediate mode start display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation intermediate mode start display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect A. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. Say. The "mode" as used herein means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variation shown in FIG. 123 (A) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 123 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the fluctuation, and then the "success mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state remains in the normal state and the "failure mode" is entered. In both success mode and failure mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

When a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) elapses after the fluctuation display in FIG. 123 (A), the fluctuation display disappears and the text "success mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 123 (B). The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 123C, the failure mode entry image LMG described in the characters "failure mode entry" is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the failure mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the failure mode entry image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the variable display, the four hold icons 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the hold icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop (end of a specific fluctuation). Here, the confirmation is stopped at "567". At this time, since the failure mode has already been entered, the background image and the like are already in the failure mode, and this continues. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (next variation of the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (F). In the next fluctuation, the game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in failure mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the hold icon 9C disappears when the confirmation is stopped. Here, the confirmation is stopped at "721". Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (the next variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (H). In the next fluctuation, the game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in failure mode.

Returning to FIG. 123 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) of FIG. 123 (A) is a big hit, the decoration is as shown in FIG. 123 (I) according to the operation of the effect button 63. The symbol stops in the form of a big hit. Here, the confirmation is stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is completed, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 123 (J), the success mode entry image WMG in which the characters "success mode entry" is displayed is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the success mode has been entered. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the success mode entry image WMG. Here, it switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect B. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. Say. The "mode" as used herein means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variation shown in FIG. 124 (A) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 124 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, if the lottery result is a big hit, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the fluctuation, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state remains the normal state and the "battle mode" is entered. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

When a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) elapses after the fluctuation display in FIG. 124 (A), the fluctuation display disappears as shown in FIG. 124 (B), and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the battle mode mode entry image LMG described in the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode rush image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode rush image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 124 (D), a movie image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. In addition, four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in total. After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped due to a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be. At this time, since the battle mode has already been entered, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and this is continuing. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (next variation of the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124 (F). In the next fluctuation, the game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in battle mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (G), the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped due to a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next variation (the next variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124 (H). In the next fluctuation, the game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in battle mode.

Returning to FIG. 124 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) in FIG. 124 (A) is a big hit, the decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 124 (I) according to the operation of the effect button 63. The design stops in the form of a big hit. Here, the confirmation is stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is completed, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124 (J), the time saving mode entry image WMG described in characters as "time saving mode entry" is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the time saving mode has been entered. At this time, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the time saving mode entry image WMG. Here, it switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect C. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. Say. The "mode" as used herein means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), four hold icons 9B and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variation shown in FIG. 125 (A) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 125 (A) is executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, if the lottery result is a big hit, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the fluctuation, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the player enters the "battle mode" in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

When a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) elapses after the fluctuation display in FIG. 125 (A), the fluctuation display disappears and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the battle mode mode entry image LMG described in the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode rush image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode rush image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the expectation image KG showing the expectation of the jackpot after the next fluctuation is displayed. Here, since there are four hold (hold icon 9B) of the second special symbol lottery at the time of the change (specific change), four expectations are shown. The one corresponding to the first hold to be executed next is "1st round ... 10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold to be executed next is "2nd round ... 15%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third hold is "3rd round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the 4th hold is "4th round ... 21%". When this expected degree image KG is displayed, the specific fluctuation ends and the symbol is fixed and stopped. After the fixed stop, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. are already in the battle mode, and it is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), with the start of the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation), the characters "Start the first round!" Are displayed, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. The movie image to perform is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost and fixedly stopped. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (G), when the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation following the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "Start the second round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. A movie image of the CRB fighting is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is definitely stopped due to loss. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), when the next fluctuation (the next next fluctuation after the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "3rd round start!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed. A movie image in which the enemy character CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125 (J), the ally character CRA wins, and the symbol stops at a big hit. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be. The background image continues to be in battle mode.

Returning to FIG. 125 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) of FIG. 125 (A) is a big hit, FIGS. 124 (I) and FIG. 124 (I) of the above-mentioned variable intermediate mode start display effect B. The same effect as in 124 (J) is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the variable middle mode start display effect D. If the special figure lottery result corresponding to this specific change (the change) is lost during the change, the next mode start display effect is changed even before the end (fixed stop) of the change. This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (hit or loss) of the variation. Say. The "mode" as used herein means a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the variable middle mode start display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), four hold icons 9B and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variation shown in FIG. 126 (A) corresponds to the “specific variation” in the claims. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 126 (A) is executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this fluctuation, if the lottery result is a big hit, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the fluctuation, and then the "time saving mode" of the time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the player enters the "battle mode" in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

When a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) elapses after the fluctuation display in FIG. 126 (A), the fluctuation display disappears as shown in FIG. 126 (B), and the characters "time saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The mode image MDG that has been set is displayed. Further, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

When the fluctuation is lost, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the battle mode mode entry image LMG described in the characters "battle mode entry" is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, even before the end (fixed stop) of this specific fluctuation, the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation is lost is notified. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image together with the display of the battle mode rush image LMG. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal line. The background image here includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochromatic image, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the expectation degree image KG showing the expectation degree of the jackpot after the next fluctuation and the timer image TM1 are displayed. Here, since there are four hold (hold icon 9B) of the second special symbol lottery at the time of the change (specific change), the expectation image KG shows four expectations. The one corresponding to the first hold to be executed next is "1st round ... 10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold to be executed next is "2nd round ... 15%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third hold is "3rd round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the 4th hold is "4th round ... 21%". When the timer value becomes "0" due to the countdown of the timer image TM1, both the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1 disappear from the screen, and then the symbol is fixedly stopped (the specific fluctuation ends). After the fixed stop, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. are already in the battle mode, and it is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), with the start of the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation of the specific fluctuation), the characters "Start the first round!" Are displayed, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. The movie image to perform is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again. Here, four expectations are shown as in the case of the previous fluctuation (specific fluctuation). After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), the portion of "1st round ... 10%" corresponding to the change this time moves to the right and is framed out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost and fixedly stopped. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126 (I), when the next fluctuation (the next fluctuation following the specific fluctuation) starts, the characters "Start the second round!" Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. A movie image of the CRB fighting is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again. Here, three expectations are shown in which "1st round ... 10%" has disappeared, unlike the previous fluctuation. After that, the portion of "2nd round ... 15%" corresponding to the change this time may or may not move to the right to frame out.

Returning to FIG. 126 (B), when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) in FIG. 126 (A) is a big hit, FIGS. 124 (I) and FIG. The same effect as in 124 (J) is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable middle mode start display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123C, if the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost during the specific fluctuation, the fluctuation is caused even before the end of the fluctuation. It is possible to execute the first effect (display of the failure mode entry image LMG) that notifies the start of the mode (failure mode) that advances when the corresponding lottery result is lost. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), an operation means image (button image BTN) is displayed before the notification in a specific variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), an image showing a mode (success mode) in which a lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is hit before notification in a specific fluctuation. (Mode image MDG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), in a specific variation, a specific image (expectation) suggesting the degree of expectation of each variation executed after the notification and after the specific variation. Degree image KG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific fluctuation and the gaming state (normal state) in the mode in which the game advances when the game is lost are different from each other. The gaming state at the time of a specific fluctuation is in a more advantageous state for the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific fluctuation and the gaming state (time saving state) in the mode of advancing at the time of hit are the same gaming state. , Both are in a state more advantageous to the player than the game state (normal state) in the mode in which the player advances when the player loses. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 126.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable middle mode start display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, "failure mode entry" (variation middle mode start display effect A) and "battle mode entry" (variation) are used to notify the start of the mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. It is assumed that the image LMG represented by the intermediate mode start display effects B to D) is displayed. However, the content of the image LMG is not limited to these, and may be any content. Further, the characters "rush" and "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of the mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol may not be displayed in the portion where the decorative symbol is displayed, or may be displayed in a different size (for example, smaller). If the decorative pattern is small or not displayed, it is difficult to tell whether or not the fluctuation continues at the start of the mode, and the sense of unity of the effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations can be further enhanced.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the variable medium-order mode start display effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Further, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuation".

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
If the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost during a specific change, the first notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost even before the end of the change. The production can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 further includes
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means.
In the particular variation, the operating means image is displayed prior to the notification.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the specific variation, before the notification, an image showing the mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is hit is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the specific variation, after the notification, a specific image suggesting the degree of expectation of each variation executed after the specific variation is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the gaming state in the mode in which the player advances at the time of the loss are different from each other, and the gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation is more advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the gaming state in the mode in which the player advances at the time of hitting are the same gaming states, and both are more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in the mode in which the player advances at the time of the loss. Is in a state,
A game machine characterized by that.

The predetermined image continuous display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. This predetermined image continuous display effect can be executed after a big hit game, during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, or the like. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start and command variation effect start commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect, the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. Is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect A. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the hold icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 127 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 127 (B), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and one new hold icon 9A is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the first special symbol is further won during this fluctuation, and one hold icon 9A is newly displayed, resulting in a total of two. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "567", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located on the rightmost side is concerned. Moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed at the start of this fluctuation. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smile face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). May be displayed at times. The condition for displaying the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

This fluctuation naturally corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9A is newly displayed by winning the first special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next fluctuation is started. This variation falls under the “specific variation” of the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This variation (specific variation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect B. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the hold icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 128 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 128 (B), there is a prize for the first special symbol during this fluctuation, and one new hold icon 9A is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), during this fluctuation, the first special symbol is further won, and one hold icon 9A is newly displayed, resulting in a total of two. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "567", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located on the rightmost side is concerned. Moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed at the start of this fluctuation. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smile face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). May be displayed at times. The condition for displaying the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

This fluctuation naturally corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation start of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (J), the next fluctuation is started. This variation falls under the “specific variation” of the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This variation (specific variation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect C. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), two hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 129 (A) is executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the jackpot roll (aspect) of "333", and the hold icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), the jackpot opening effect is started. Here, a character image of "big hit game start" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 129 (D). Here, a character image of "end of big hit game" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smile face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. When the jackpot game is finished, the game state is switched to the time saving state here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 129 (E) is executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold won before the big hit of FIG. 129 (B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold won before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B).

After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B). As mentioned above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold due to winning prior to the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B). As shown in FIG. 129 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), the next fluctuation is started. This variation falls under the “specific variation” of the claims. As for the game state, the time saving state continues. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This fluctuation (specific fluctuation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to the winning before the big hit in FIG. 129 (B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined image continuous display effect D. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as a predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect D, the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (non-time saving state), and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the decorative symbol is "333". The confirmation is stopped at the jackpot (mode) of, and the hold icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the jackpot opening effect is started. Here, a character image of "big hit game start" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 130 (C). Here, a character image of "end of big hit game" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here, as an example thereof, it is configured as a character image representing a smile face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

When a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined image CHA is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to cover a part of the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB is an image representing a specific object like the predetermined image CHA, and here, it is configured as a character image representing a smile wearing sunglasses. After that, the jackpot game ends, and here, the game state is switched to the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation of FIG. 130 (E) is executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold won before the big hit of FIG. 130 (A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the hold won before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and are continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 130 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. This fluctuation also corresponds to the hold that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the hold by winning before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A). As shown in FIG. 130 (H), during this fluctuation, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), the fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at "123", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the fluctuation of this fluctuation, and are continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (J), the next fluctuation is started. This variation falls under the “specific variation” of the claims. As for the game state, the time saving state continues. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB disappear at the same time as the start of this fluctuation. This fluctuation (specific fluctuation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to the winning before the big hit in FIG. 130 (A).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the predetermined image continuous display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 (E) to 127 (I), the first effect in which the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and FIG. 127 (J). As shown in the above, a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific fluctuation after a plurality of fluctuations starts can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holdings that have been won before the predetermined image CHA is displayed, and the specific fluctuations are It is a fluctuation corresponding to the hold that won a prize during multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations is executed after the hit game, and the predetermined image predetermined image CHA is displayed during the hit game and after the hit game. , Is displayed continuously in multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 130.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, after the predetermined image CHA is displayed during the hit game, the specific image CHB is displayed overlapping the predetermined image CHA, and after the hit game, a plurality of times It is continuously displayed in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations is the fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the specific variation is the first special symbol or The other variation of the second special symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 130.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the predetermined image continuous display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, it is assumed that the character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. However, the predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a character image representing a specific content, an image for calling attention to the ball removal, or a game ball to be inserted at a specific position. It may be an image that prompts. Alternatively, it may be a right-handed image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, the plurality of fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to 129 (I) are the fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129 (J) are the second special. It was assumed that it was a change in the design lottery. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite to each other. That is, even if the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to 129 (I) are the fluctuations of the second special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129 (J) are the fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery. Good.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D can be appropriately combined.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
The first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and
A second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when the specific fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations starts can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holds that have been won before the predetermined image is displayed.
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold won during the plurality of variations.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The plurality of fluctuations are executed after the winning game.
The predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, and is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image, and is
After the predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the hit game, it is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The plurality of fluctuations is a fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
The specific variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the other of the second special symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The predetermined image is an image that encourages the ball to enter a specific position.
A game machine characterized by that.

The background image switching effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. This background image switching effect can be executed after a big hit game, during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, or the like. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start and command variation effect start commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the background image switching effect, the corresponding image data is output from the ROM 103. The image is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Background image switching effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect A. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as stopping the confirmation of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the confirmation stop. In the background image switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). Four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The gaming state is the normal state (non-time saving state).

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, a monochromatic image, or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by the movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 131 (B). Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) is decelerated as shown in FIG. 131 (D). Temporarily stop at "789". The temporary stop here means a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed side by side with the decorative symbols slightly raised and lowered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a here. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative symbol that has been stopped for confirmation disappears, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 131 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". As shown in FIGS. 131 (G) and 131 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the character image MLG is "spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "spring coming soon". The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect B. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as stopping the confirmation of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the confirmation stop. In the background image switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). Here, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. Further, four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The game state is a time saving state.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, a monochromatic image, or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by the movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 132 (B). Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 132 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) is decelerated as shown in FIG. 132 (D). Temporarily stop at "789". The temporary stop here means a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed side by side with the decorative symbols slightly raised and lowered. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixedly stopped, and the background images are changed from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Switch to. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a here. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) that have been stopped for confirmation disappear, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 132 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 132 (G) and 132 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 132 (E) to 132 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the character image MLG is "spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "spring coming soon". The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect C. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as stopping the confirmation of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the confirmation stop. In the background image switching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, the game state is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R), the hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, a monochromatic image, or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by the movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 133 (B). Here, "3 seconds left" is described. At this time, the first background image HG1 is continuously displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1 as shown in FIG. 133 (D). The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a here. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 133 (G) and 133 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 133 (E) to 133 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (J), the character image MLG of "Spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon" and the character image MLG is "spring", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "spring coming soon". The variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect D. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) at the same time as stopping the confirmation of the symbol, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the confirmation stop. In the background image switching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, at the lower left of the display screen 7a, a hold promotion image of "Reserve hold !!" and a hold number image showing the current hold number of the second special symbol of "hold number 0" are displayed. The game state is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R), the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are not displayed.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and the background image includes an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image, a monochromatic image, or a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by the movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 134 (B). Here, "3 seconds left" is described. Due to the winning of the second special symbol, the number of pending images is "2 on hold". As shown in FIG. 134 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the end image of "up to that point !!" and "first hold ... 10%" "second hold ..."・ 20% ”expectation suggestion image is displayed. The expectation suggestion image shows the expectation of each jackpot of these two holds. Specifically, it shows that the expectation of the next fluctuation is 10% and the expectation of the next fluctuation is 20%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, the character image of "It's about to start" is displayed. This suggests that the fluctuations corresponding to the two holds will begin soon. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixedly stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown on the entire display screen 7a here. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "coming soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 134 (G) and 134 (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in a fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 134 (E) to 134 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the determination of the symbol is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next fluctuation, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (J), the character image MLG of "may hit" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "coming soon", the character image MLG is "may be hit", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "may be hit soon". The variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the background image switching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 131 (D), with the first effect of changing the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) while displaying the first background image HG1. After the first effect, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), a second effect of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern and switching the background image from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, and the second effect. After the effect, as shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), a third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image HG2 can be executed while the determination of the decorative symbol is stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), after the third effect, the background image is changed from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 with the start of the next variation of the decorative symbol. The fourth effect to be switched can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), in the first effect, the timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is displayed, and the timer value of the timer image TM1 is a predetermined value. When it reaches (0 in this case), the second effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP is framed in while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. A fifth effect of frame-out can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP flows while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), in the fourth effect, the character image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is displayed, and in the third effect, the telop image TRP. The contents of the characters represented by the above and the characters represented by the character image MLG in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form one sentence when combined. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the background image switching effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the background image may be completely switched in an instant, or may be partially switched gradually. Further, both background images may be superimposed and displayed for a predetermined period.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of the background image switching effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A part of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of types of background images.
The first effect of changing the decorative pattern while displaying the first background image, and
After the first effect, a second effect of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern and switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, and
After the second effect, a third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image while the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
After the third effect, a fourth effect of switching the background image from the second background image to the third background image can be executed at the start of the next variation of the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image.
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while the first background image is displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
In the third effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is framed in and out while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4.
The predetermined image is a telop image, and is
In the third effect, the telop image flows while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E6-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 5, which is subordinate to claim 2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a character image.
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is displayed.
In the third effect, the characters represented by the telop image and the characters represented by the character image in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form one sentence. ing,
A game machine characterized by that.

The image blurring effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. In FIGS. 135 to 138, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also viewed in the drawing. Some are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This image blurring effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image blur effect, the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. Is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position of 14R and the light emitting mode are changed.

Here, the image blur effect A will be described first, and the image blur effect B, the image blur effect C, and the image blur effect D will be described in order.

[Image blur effect A]
First, the image blur effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect A. The image blur effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, this is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and the shape and color of the hold icon 9C suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the shape of the hold icon 9A is changed to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the move.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with zero special figure reservations and the red number "0" separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (A).

The variable display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops. Is displayed). The left decorative symbol 8L displayed as a temporary stop is a clear one in focus, and is displayed on the display screen 7a immediately before the temporary stop is displayed (or when the vehicle is decelerated to display the temporary stop). It is displayed large in the area on the left half of. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, the number HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and is immediately before the temporary stop is displayed (or when decelerated to display the temporary stop). In the central area of the display screen 7a, the size is the same as (or almost the same as) the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that has already been temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped is in focus, the left decorative symbol 8L that is already temporarily stopped is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). It is unclear.

The clearly focused right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped is at least a part of the unclear left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (the number "left decorative symbol 8L" here. It is displayed in a state of overlapping on the front side of (about the right side part) of 3 ").

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. 0 ”) continues to be displayed in FIG. 135 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (B).

An out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring that blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, returns to the size at the time of fluctuation and becomes smaller, and becomes clear in focus. The left decorative symbol 8L starts moving into its own variable display area and is temporarily stopped and displayed again. In addition, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, returns to the size at the time of fluctuation and becomes smaller and becomes clear in focus (the size of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L). The size of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are both in focus and clear), and the right decorative symbol 8R starts moving into its own variable display area. Then, the temporary stop is displayed again. In addition, the number HMG (here, the number HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (C). Further, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in parallel with the upper side of the display screen 7a and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the upper left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L (hereinafter, simply referred to as "upper left decorative symbol 8La"; here, the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 8L on the side, and the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R (hereinafter, simply referred to as “upper right decorative symbol 8Ra”; here, the number “2”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the side. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a and temporarily stopped, and within the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 8L on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L (hereinafter, simply referred to as "lower left decorative symbol 8Lb") has the same symbol as the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra (here, the number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display screen 7a is displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R (hereinafter, simply referred to as "lower right decorative symbol 8Rb") is the same as the upper left decorative symbol 8La in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the lower right side (here, the number "3"). ) Is displayed as a temporary stop.

As a result, the upward-sloping symbol alignment line L1 connecting the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb and the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra becomes the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form the first reach, and the upper left The downward-sloping symbol alignment line L2 connecting the decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb becomes the same symbol (here, the number "3"), and the second reach is formed. That is, a so-called "double reach" is formed by the upward-sloping symbol alignment line by the first reach and the downward-sloping symbol alignment line by the second reach. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C still fluctuates at high speed in a semi-transparent state within its own variable display area. In addition, the number HMG (here, the number HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), the fluctuating speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is decelerated and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again in its own fluctuation display area, and the fluctuation display continues. Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (here, the number “1”) is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the number "9" preceding the number "1" is displayed in a manner in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a at a low speed, and is displayed from the lower part of the number "9". While the number "2" following this number "1" disappears toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a at low speed. The variable display is displayed, and the lower part of the number "2" appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a. Since the intermediate decoration symbol 8C is variablely displayed behind the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd, even if the intermediate decoration symbol 8C is variablely displayed, the hold icon 9C is displayed. The four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd are covered with the intermediate decorative symbol 8C so that the visibility is not hindered.

Number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (E).

As shown in FIG. 135 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has the number "2" following the number "1" rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. The display mode is changed at low speed, and a temporary stop is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Designs with the same 8Ra (here, the number "2") are lined up. In addition, the number HMG (here, the number HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), the upper left decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb on the downward-sloping symbol alignment line by the second reach are out of focus and blurred (so-called). , "Out of focus") becomes obscure. In addition, a number HMG (here, a number HMG) indicating a first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and a second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (G).

A big hit is achieved by arranging the same symbols (here, the number "2") for the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra on the upward-sloping symbol alignment line by the first reach. As shown in 135 (I), the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8R are increased so that the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a is within the variable display area of each. The stop display is performed side by side in a straight line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoints on the right side, the variation display ends, and then the jackpot game (big hit effect) is started.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (H). Further, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (H). Further, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

The size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIGS. 135 (F) and 135 (G) is the same as the size at the time of fluctuation (for example, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (D)). Therefore, it is larger than the sizes of the upper left decorative symbol 8La, the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra, and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb. Further, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (I) are the normal sizes (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 135 (D)). Although it is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIGS. 135 (B) and 135 (C), it is smaller than the size of the right decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (C).

In this way, in the image blurring effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (out-of-focus, unclear image) are used. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative symbols with a certain left decorative symbol 8L, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

In addition, the order of the images that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production (in other words, the left decorative design 8L and then the right decorative design 8R) are focused and the player wants to pay attention to the images (in other words, the production). It can contribute to convey the thoughts of the creator)) to the player.

Further, in the image blurring effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image (out-of-focus, unclear image) that is out of focus are used. While a certain left decorative symbol 8L realizes an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative symbols, in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (I), the number HMG is the game of the game machine 1. Regardless of the state, it is always in focus and clear. As a result, the player grasps the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect B]
Next, the image blurring effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect B. The image blurring effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136A, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, this is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and the shape and color of the hold icon 9C suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the shape of the hold icon 9A is changed to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the move.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with zero special figure reservations and the red number "0" separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 136 (A).

The variable display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 136 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 136 (B), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the effect button imitating the effect button 63. The image BTN is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is a clear one that is in focus and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, the number HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (A).

As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), in order to encourage the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is predetermined. Is displayed in the light emitting mode (here, blinking white). At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the sword image KG is a clear one that is in focus and is in the central area of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN that is already displayed becomes unclear because its focus is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The focused and clear sword image KG is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN (the right part of the effect button image BTN).

Number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (B).

The out-of-focus, unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and is in a predetermined light emitting mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, the still image is either lit or off. It is in a state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, the size of the effect button image BTN does not change.

An out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring that blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear one in focus (focus) on the display screen. It is moved from the left side of 7a to the center again, and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the already displayed sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the effect button image BTN is a clear one in focus and is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the area of. Since the production button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed sword image KG is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The focused and clear effect button image BTN is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear sword image KG (the left part of the brim of the sword image KG).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (C).

The out-of-focus, unclear sword image KG is a still image, and is in a predetermined light emitting mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, the still image is in a lit state or an extinguished state). ). Further, when the sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (B), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking white to blinking blue).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the sword image KG displayed in the out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear one in focus (focus) on the display screen 7a. It is moved to the center again from the right side of the screen, and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the sword image KG is a clear one that is in focus and is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the area of. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN that is already displayed becomes unclear because its focus is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The focused and clear sword image KG is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN (the left part of the effect button image BTN).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (D).

The out-of-focus, unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and is in a predetermined light emitting mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, the still image is either lit or off. It is in a state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (E) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (D), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking blue to blinking green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear one in focus (focus) on the display screen. It is moved from the right side to the left side of 7a without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. Further, the sword image KG displayed in a clearly focused state is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (E).

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (E), and the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed to something (for example, changing from blinking green to blinking red). Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (E), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, changed from blinking green to blinking red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), the effect button image BTN displayed in a clearly focused state moves from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing the size. At the same time, it is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the effect button image BTN, a message MG "press !!" prompting the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. At this time, the sword image KG displayed in a clear state in focus is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (F).

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (F), and there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit. It may be changed to something (for example, it may be changed from blinking red to blinking gold (blinking yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. The fluctuation display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that the design is off.

Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are held. The indicated number HMG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (G). Further, when the variation display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation display ends.

On the other hand, following FIG. 136 (F), as shown in FIG. 136 (I), the sword image KG displayed in a clearly focused state is moved from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center again. It is moved without changing its size and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. Further, the sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. At this time, the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear state in focus is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (F).

The predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (I) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed (for example, from red blinking to gold blinking (yellow blinking) or seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (big hit rich)).

When the player operates (pushes down) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. The fluctuation display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "1", so that the same symbol is used. It will be stopped and displayed as a big hit, and then the big hit game (big hit production) will be started.

Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are held. The indicated number HMG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (I). Further, even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is still maintained in FIG. 136 (I). With the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are displayed in FIG. 136 (F), the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed, and the sword image in FIG. 136 (I). In some cases, KG is selected and displayed, and the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (I) is selected and displayed as compared with the case where the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed. There is a higher probability that a jackpot game (big hit production) will occur.

In this way, in the image blurring effect B, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, indistinct). The effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are (images), can be used to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which makes the player visually enjoyable. It is possible to avoid it, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production (in other words, first, the production button image BTN, the sword image KG, the production button image BTN, and the sword image KG are focused in this order and the player is focused. It can contribute to telling the player the order of the images to be made (the thought of the creator of the production).

Further, in the image blurring effect B, for example, an effect button image BTN or a sword image KG, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, indistinct). The effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are images), realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, whereas FIGS. 136 (A) to FIGS. In 136 (J), the number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player grasps the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect C]
Next, the image blur effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect C. The image blurring effect C is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, this is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and the shape and color of the hold icon 9C suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the shape of the hold icon 9A is changed to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the move.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with zero special figure reservations and the red number "0" separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 137 (A).

When the reach is formed in FIG. 137 (A), as shown in FIG. 137 (B), the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is used to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. Is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. This effect button image BTN is a clear one that is in focus and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (A).

As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), almost the right side of the display screen 7a. The upper body of the character CRA with a sword is placed and displayed in the entire area. This character CRA is a clear one that is in focus, and is displayed in a large size over substantially the entire right side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which were displayed in a clear state of being in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (B). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is rearranged in the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. At this time, the effect button image BTN is clearly arranged in front of the already displayed character CRA and is in focus, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 137 (B). ) Is displayed in the same position as shown in). Since the effect button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. ..

Clear in-focus effect button image The BTN is displayed overlaid on the front side of at least part of the out-of-focus, obscure character CRA (the right shoulder, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). There is.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

An out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring that blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image. Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (B), and the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed to something (for example, changing from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the display screen 7a is substantially in the center. The upper body of the character CRB with a sword is placed and displayed facing the character CRA. This character CRB is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size over substantially the entire left side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which were displayed in a clear state of being in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, because the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is still out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The in-focus, clear character CRB appears to overlap at least part of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (D). The character CRB may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the character CRA displayed in an out-of-focus and unclear state changes to a clear one in focus, and covers almost the entire right area of the display screen 7a. A clear character CRA that is in focus is displayed, and a clear character CRB that is in focus is displayed in almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is a character CRA). It is displayed by moving it from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side in order to keep a gap). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), the message MG of the vertically written image "Battle start" is displayed in the area extending from the center to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The message MG of this vertical writing image is a clear one that is in focus, and the two characters CRA and CRB that have already been displayed are out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). It is unclear.

The clearly focused vertical image message MG of "Battle Start" is displayed so that it overlaps at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the sword part of the character CRA). At the same time, it is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRB (the right shoulder and the sword part of the character CRB).

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the out-of-focus state are changed to clear ones in focus and displayed on the display screen 7a, 2 Action production (battle production) by one character CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (G).

In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), an enlarged motion blur in which the alphabet V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front side is displayed. This magnified motion blur to the remnants of the letter V is also created as an unclear one whose focus is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"). This out-of-focus, obscure image is performed by magnified motion blur image processing and spreads from the center to the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or to the target layer of multiple layers. It blurs in the direction of the image, and the blur becomes stronger from the center to the outer circumference as the distance dimension increases from the center. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. It is created by doing.

When the player sees the image of the alphabet V that has been processed with this enlarged motion blur image, the player can be given the impression that he / she is moving toward the image of the alphabet V, and at the same time, he / she moves to the center of the image of the alphabet V. A sense of speed can be obtained, and it is possible to suggest that the friendly character CRA will soon defeat the enemy character CRB. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started), and at the end of the action effect (battle effect), here, the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. This is done, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. Arranged and displayed.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. 0 ”) continues to be displayed in FIG. 137 (I). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (I).

After that, although not shown, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, A jackpot game (big hit production) that becomes a jackpot and gives profits to the player will be performed. Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are held. The indicated number HMG (here "0 0") is subsequently displayed in FIG. 137 (J). Further, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (J). The hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

On the other hand, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "1", which are the same symbols (here, the number "1"). ) Are not aligned and the stop display is displayed, and when the variable display ends, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. When the variation display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation display ends.

In this way, in the image blurring effect C, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus, and the indistinct image (out of focus, indistinct) that is out of focus. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN by using the character CRB which is an image), the player can visually see the player. It can be entertained and can be enjoyed.

In addition, we want the player to pay attention to the image (in other words, first, the effect button image BTN, the character CRA, the effect button image BTN, and the character CRB) that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the effect. It can contribute to telling the player the order of the images (thoughts of the creator of the production).

Further, in the image blur effect C, for example, a character CRA or an effect button image BTN, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, unclear). The character CRB, which is an image), realizes an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, whereas FIGS. 137 (A) to FIG. In FIG. 137 (J), the numerical value HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player grasps the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect D]
Next, the image blur effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect D. The image blurring effect D is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blurring effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, this is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and the shape and color of the hold icon 9C suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad. When moving to, when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the shape of the hold icon 9A is changed to another shape, respectively. The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the move.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with zero special figure reservations and the red number "0" separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 138 (A).

When the reach is formed in FIG. 138 (A), as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the upper body of the character CRA holding the sword is arranged and displayed on the entire right side region of the display screen 7a. This character CRA is a clear one that is in focus, and is displayed in a large size over substantially the entire right side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the number HMG) indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (A). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138C, the upper body of the character CRB holding the sword is arranged and displayed facing the character CRA substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRB is clearly focused and is displayed in a large size over substantially the entire left side region of the display screen 7a. At this time, since the character CRB is in focus (focus), the character CRA that has already been displayed becomes unclear because the focus (focus) is deviated and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The in-focus, clear character CRB appears to overlap at least part of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (B).

The clear character CRB that is in focus may be a still image or a moving image. Further, the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image.

An out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring that blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. It is created by doing. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the character CRB is displayed by moving from substantially the center of the display screen 7a to the left side in order to keep a distance from the character CRA, and is displayed in an out-of-focus state. The character CRA changes to a clear one that is in focus, and almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (battle effect). To be started). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (D).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the initial action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the initial stage of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), in the middle stage of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, with half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left decorative part and the right movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode. At the same time, the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, and an effect suggesting the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example,). Due to another light emitting mode (for example, red light emitting mode) different from the white light emitting mode), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a red light emitting mode, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear. , There is no production that suggests the victory of the ally character CRA.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate to cover the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate by the letter "V". The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection. Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are emitted toward the front through the light guide plate, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (G).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "victory". Message MG is placed and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. Arranged and displayed.

A number HMG (here, "0") indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. "0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "1"). When the variable display ends, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which a jackpot is obtained and a profit is given to the player. Even after the variation display ends, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are held. The indicated number HMG (here "0 0") is subsequently displayed in FIG. 138 (I). Further, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (I). The hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

On the other hand, when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number on the display screen 7a. "2", the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "1", and the same symbol (here, the number "1") is not aligned and is stopped and displayed, and when the variation display ends, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. When the variation display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation display ends.

In this way, in the image blurring effect D, the character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image (out of focus, indistinct) that is out of focus. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB by using the character CRA (friend character CRA) which is an image), the player can be visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, an image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the production (in other words, an image that the player wants to focus on in the order of the character CRA (friendly character CRA) and the character CRB (enemy character CRB). It can contribute to telling the player the order (thoughts of the creator of the production).

Further, in the image blurring effect D, for example, a character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image (out of focus, unclear) that is out of focus (unfocused). In contrast to FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (J), the character CRA (friendly character CRA), which is an image), and the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB are expressed with a sense of depth. , The numerical value HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player grasps the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It can be made easier.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blurring effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 (C) of the image blurring effect A. The first effect of displaying the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (B), which is a clear first image, and the first effect of FIG. 135 (B), which is a first image clearly displayed by the first effect. The second effect of displaying the left decorative pattern 8L indistinctly like the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C) and the first image of the first image indistinctly displayed by the second effect of FIG. 135 (C). ), A third effect of clearly displaying the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a second image, at a position different from the left decorative symbol 8L of) can be executed. According to this configuration, the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, and the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, form a first. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the image and the second image, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (B) to 136 (C), the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is a clear second image, and the unclear first image, FIG. 136 (C). ) Production button image BTN and the arrangement of the first image and the second image can be expressed with a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually entertained and enjoyed. It can be improved.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (E), for example, the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 137, which is an unclear first image, are shown. With the character CRA of E), it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. Can be planned.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (B) to 138 (C), the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image. Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image by using the character CRA of the above, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. be able to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (C) of the image blurring effect A, FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image clearly displayed by the third effect. The right decorative symbol 8R overlaps with at least a part of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C), which is the first image that is obscured by the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135 (C), the clearly focused right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped is at least the out-of-focus and unclear left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of a part (about the right side part of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3")). According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 (C), the clear sword image KG, which is the second image and is in focus, is at least one of the out-of-focus and unclear effect button images BTN, which is the first image. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the front side of the part (the right part of the effect button image BTN). According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 (E), the focused and clear character CRB of the second image is at least a part (character) of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA of the first image. It is displayed so that it overlaps the front side of the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the CRA. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 (C), the focused and clear character CRB of the second image is at least a part (character) of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA of the first image. It is displayed so that it overlaps the front side of the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of the CRA. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (C) of the image blurring effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) can display the hold icon 9C. Then, when the third effect is executed, the hold icon 9C is hidden in FIG. 135 (C). According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, and the right decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, due to the third effect. Since the visibility of 8R is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, and FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image. ) Right decorative symbol 8R and the right decorative symbol 8R can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, are produced. It can be provided to the player.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (C), the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is an unclear first image due to the third effect, and the clear second effect. Since the visibility of the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is an image, is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is an unclear first image, is clear. The second image, the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the production by the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is a clear second image, is played. Can be provided to the person.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (E), the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is an unclear first image by the third effect, and the clear second image are used. Since the visibility of the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E) and the clear second image are obscured first images. The character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the player is provided with the effect of the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E), which is a clear second image. can do.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (C), the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image by the third effect, and the clear second image are used. Since the visibility of the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C) is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C) and the clear second image are obscured first images. The character CRB of FIG. 138 (C) and the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the player is provided with the effect of the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the character CRB of FIG. 138 (E), which is a clear second image. can do.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (I) of the image blurring effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) is a numerical image indicating the number of hold icons. The number HMG (here, “0 0”) is always displayed, and even if the second effect is executed, the number HMG (here, “0 0”), which is a numerical image, is clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C) is displayed as being clear to indistinct by the second effect, whereas the number HMG which is a numerical image (here, “0”). Since 0 ") is always displayed as clear, the player can easily grasp the number of hold icons.
Image blur effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (J), image blur effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (J), image blur effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (J). The same applies to.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (D) of the image blurring effect A, the image blurring effect A is unclearly displayed by the second effect after the third effect. The left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is the first image, is made clear again like the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (D), and the left decoration of FIG. 135 (D), which is the first image, is further clarified. It is possible to execute a fourth effect of displaying the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, so as not to overlap each other. According to this configuration, when the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (D), which is the first image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, are arranged, they overlap each other. However, since it is displayed as a clear image, the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (D), which is the first image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D), which is the second image, It is possible to suggest to the player that the production related to the above will be developed from this.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), which is the first image, and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), which is the second image, are shown. When the sword image KG is arranged, it does not overlap with each other and is displayed as a clear image. Therefore, in the first image, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), and the second image, It is possible to suggest to the player that the production related to the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (F) is further developed.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (F), which is the first image, and the character CRB of FIG. 137 (F), which is the second image. And, when they are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images. Therefore, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (F), which is the first image, and FIG. 137 (F), which is the second image. ) Character CRB and the effect related to it can be suggested to the player.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (D), which is the first image, and the character CRB of FIG. 138 (D), which is the second image. And, when they are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images. Therefore, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (D), which is the first image, and FIG. 138 (D), which is the second image. ) Character CRB and the effect related to it can be suggested to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 (D) of the image blurring effect A, FIGS. 135 (B) and 135 (B), which are first images clearly displayed, The left decorative symbol 8L of D) and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIGS. 135 (C) and (D), which are the second images, are images that are in focus and are displayed indistinctly. The left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C) is an image that is out of focus. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of FIGS. 136 (B) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button images BTN and the second image of FIGS. 136 (B) and 136 (F), which are the first images clearly displayed. The sword images KG of FIGS. 136 (C) and 136 (F) are images that are in focus, and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is the first image that is displayed indistinctly, is , The image is out of focus. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F), for example, the character CRA and the second image of FIGS. 137 (C) and 137 (F), which are the first images to be clearly displayed. The character CRB of FIGS. 137 (E) and 137 (F) is an image that is in focus, and the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is the first image that is displayed indistinctly, is in focus. There is no image. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D), the character CRA of FIGS. 138 (B) and 138 (D) which are clearly displayed first images and FIG. 138 which is the second image. The character CRBs (C) and (D) are images that are in focus, and the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is the first image that is displayed indistinctly, is an image that is not in focus. Is. According to this configuration, it can be expressed as if it were an image taken by a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (A) of the image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are symbol variation based on the hold icon 9C. It can be executed when the display is started and there is no hold icon. That is, in the image blurring effect A, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. As a result, this is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.
The same applies to the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 (A), the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 (A), and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 (A).

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image blurring effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, they are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, as the hold icon 9B displayed in the first hold display position as the second special figure hold moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position to the fourth It may be an effect performed when the hold icon 9B no longer exists at the hold display position. To briefly explain the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position where the hold icon 9B is displayed as the second special figure hold, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol that are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold The hold icon 9C corresponding to 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions are referred to as a first hold display position, a second hold display position, a third hold display position, and a fourth hold display position from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order.

[Modification 2]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged on the back side is focused ( By making it unclear (so-called "out of focus") that is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"), and making it clear that the second image placed in the foreground is in focus. It was possible to express it as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field. This is because an out-of-focus, unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to obtain an image taken with a shallow depth of field, or an image taken with a deep depth of field may be obtained. In this way, the expression of the production can be expanded.

[Modification 3]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged on the back side is focused ( The focus) was out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed on the front side was in focus and clear. However, as a completely opposite relationship to this, the first image placed on the back side is made clear with focus, and the second image placed on the front side is made clear. It may be unclear because it is out of focus and blurry (so-called “out of focus”). By using a so-called zoom lens, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of focusing on one subject from among the images that are multiple subjects in the depth direction, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. it can. An unclear image that is out of focus is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. The unclear image that is out of focus is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification example 4]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged on the back side is focused ( The focus) was out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed on the front side was in focus and clear. However, among a plurality of subjects existing in the depth direction, the images of some subjects having different distance dimensions in the depth direction are made clear and focused, and the images of other subjects are defined. It may be unclear because it is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"). By doing so, since the image has a sense of discomfort, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high. An unclear image that is out of focus is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer among the plurality of layers. That is, the out-of-focus and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 blurs the defocused clear image (image data) read from the ROM 103 in real time. The unclear image that is out of focus is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification 5]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, they are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, the game state may be a time saving state and the number of times may be limited. For example, the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time saving state can be changed only once or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the out-of-focus unclear image is processed by blurring image processing (for example, by Gaussian blurring). It is done and created by blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using the Gaussian function), and this blur image processing is done for the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or out of multiple layers. It was performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. However, in addition to the clear image (image data) that is in focus, the unclear image (image data) that is out of focus may be stored in the ROM 103 in advance and read from the ROM 103 if necessary. In this case, if there is sufficient free space in the capacity of the ROM 103, it is possible to save an unclear image (image data) that is out of focus in addition to a clear image (image data) that is in focus. The image control microcomputer 101 does not need to perform blur image processing in real time, which can contribute to reducing the load on the image control microcomputer 101.

[Modification 7]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the out-of-focus unclear image is processed by blurring image processing (for example, by Gaussian blurring). It is done and created by blurring the image by varying the standard deviation using the Gaussian function), and this blur image processing is done for the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or out of multiple layers. It was performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. This blurred image processing may be, for example, an effect of displaying numbers one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and counting down. In this countdown effect, for example, when displaying numbers "5" → number "4" → number "3" → number "2" → number "1" → number "0" one after another on the display screen 7a, First, the number "5" is displayed as a clear image that is in focus, and then the number "5" is out of focus, and the focus is on the front side of the number "5". The number "4" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image that matches. Subsequently, the number "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "4" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "4" is focused on the front side of the number "4" as a clear image. 3 ”is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "4" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "3" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "3" is focused on the front side of the number "3" as a clear image. 2 ”is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "3" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "2" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "2" is focused on the front side of the number "2" as a clear image. 1 ”is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "2" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "1" is defocused as an unclear image, and the number "1" is in focus as a clear image in front of the number "1". 0 ”is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and then the number "0" is erased from the display screen 7a to develop the super reach effect.

[Modification 8]
In the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 and the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 9]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, they are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, as the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position 9Ad to the first 4 When the hold icon no longer exists at the hold display position 9Ad, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R is started, and the 135 image blur effect A and the image blur effect of FIG. 136 are started. B, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 are not performed, and the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R are not aligned with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"). It may be stopped and displayed as a stop. In this case, another reach effect different from the image blur effect A in FIG. 135, the image blur effect B in FIG. 136, the image blur effect C in FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D in FIG. 138 (for example, hit (big hit, small hit)). It may be missed through the so-called "normal reach"), which has the lowest degree of expectation, or it may be missed through other reach effects.

[Modification 10]
The image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. The effect may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The first effect that clearly displays the first image and
A second effect of obscuring the first image clearly displayed by the first effect, and a second effect.
It is possible to carry out a third effect of clearly displaying the second image at a position different from that of the first image, which is obscured by the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1.
The second image, which is clearly displayed by the third effect, overlaps with at least a part of the first image, which is obscured by the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1 or aspect E7-2.
The display means can display the hold icon.
When the third effect is executed, the hold icon is hidden.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3.
The display means always displays a numerical image showing the number of hold icons.
Even if the second effect is executed, the numerical image is clearly displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4.
After the third effect, the first image that is obscured by the second effect is clarified again, and the first image and the second image are displayed so as not to overlap with each other. It is possible to carry out the fourth production
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5.
The first image and the second image that are clearly displayed are in-focus images.
The first image, which is displayed indistinctly, is an out-of-focus image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6.
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed when the symbol variation display based on the hold icon is started and when no hold icon exists.
A game machine characterized by that.

The winning notification effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7. In addition, the winning notification effect is executed in a predetermined period over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Winning notification effect A]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to "right-handed". Here, the message image MSG "right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold increases to the upper limit (4), and four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the final battle notice effect is executed. The final battle notice effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle notice production, the message image MSG "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Up to the defeat effect, which will be described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and is a look-ahead effect including three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character who is an opponent of a ally character appears. Here, the enemy character CRD appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the ally character wins this battle effect, a hit (big hit or small hit) is determined. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect when all of the fluctuation and the three holds are lost. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost. After the defeat production is performed, the remaining hold, which is a loss, is quickly digested.

[Winning notification effect B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to "right-handed". Here, the message image MSG "right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold increases to the upper limit (4), and four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the final battle notice effect is executed. The final battle notice effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle notice production, the message image MSG "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Up to the defeat effect, which will be described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and is a look-ahead effect including three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character who is an opponent of a ally character appears. Here, the enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the ally character wins this battle effect, a hit (big hit or small hit) is determined. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), the winning effect is executed. The winning effect is an effect when there is a hit in the fluctuation and the three holds. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost. It is assumed that the next hold is a winning hold AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), the hold digestion effect is executed. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the pending AT of the hit is fixedly stopped at "555" and becomes a hit. The last hold is not digested.

[Winning notification effect C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to "right-handed". Here, the message image MSG "right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold increases to the upper limit (4), and four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The first battle effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The second battle effect is a variation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the friendly character CRC and the enemy character CRC have fought and the friendly character CRC has been defeated. The third battle effect is a variation corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. It should be noted that the fourth battle production is a production with fluctuations corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat production is a production indicating that the player has been defeated in the fourth battle production. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of performing a fixed stop of fluctuations. Here, the message image MSG "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixedly stopped at "565" and is lost.

[Winning notification effect D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect of notifying that the fluctuation is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final fluctuation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”) is losing. In the loss notification effect, the message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to "right-handed". Here, the message image MSG "right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "right-hands", the second special figure hold increases to the upper limit (4), and four hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The first battle effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has been defeated. The second battle effect is a variation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the friendly character CRC and the enemy character CRC have fought and the friendly character CRC has been defeated. The third battle effect is a variation corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation continues assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD have fought and the ally character CRA has won. It should be noted that the fourth battle production is a production with fluctuations corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect indicating that the player has won in the fourth battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect of performing a fixed stop of fluctuation. Here, the message image MSG "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixedly stopped at "555" and becomes a hit.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of holds are present in the second special figure hold, a look-ahead that determines in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is performed. This is performed to notify whether or not there is a hit as a look-ahead effect (FIGS. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of winning in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of holds are present in the second special figure hold, a look-ahead that determines in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is performed. As a look-ahead effect, it is notified whether or not there is a hit in the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold (FIGS. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C)). (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of winning in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (4) of holds are present in the second special figure hold, whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure hold is determined by the second special figure. Notifies whether or not there is a hit in each fluctuation corresponding to the hold (FIGS. 141 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H), FIG. 142 (C) (D) (E) ( F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes clear in order whether or not there is a hit in a fixed number of holds, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the game state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”), by executing the right-handed promotion effect, the second special figure hold is the upper limit (4). (FIG. 139 (B), FIG. 140 (B), FIG. 141 (B), FIG. 142 (B)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily create a state in which a predetermined number of holds exist, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hit is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the hit is notified, the undigested hold in the past is digested rather than the hold that became the hit (FIGS. 140 (G) (H)). .. According to this configuration, after a series of productions, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the loss is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the loss is notified, the undigested hold is digested (FIGS. 139 (G) (H)). According to this configuration, after a series of productions, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters appearing after the final battle notice effect may be selected according to the degree of expectation of winning (FIGS. 139 (D) and 140 (D)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters appearing in the first battle, the second battle, the third battle, and the fourth battle may be selected according to the degree of expectation of winning (FIG. 141 (Fig. 141). C) (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 142 (C) (D) (E) (F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the definite stop effect (loss), and the definite stop effect (hit) were executed for the fourth battle effect (FIGS. 141 (G) (H), 142 (G)). (H)). On the other hand, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the definite stop effect (loss), and the definite stop effect (hit) may be executed for the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect. ..

[Modification example 4]
In the above, the example in which the ally character wins in the 4th battle production is given, but when the ally character wins in the 1st battle production, when the ally character wins in the 2nd battle production, the ally character wins in the 3rd battle production. May win. When a teammate character wins in the first battle effect, it is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the first battle effect. Similarly, when a ally character wins in the second battle effect, it is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the second battle effect, and when the ally character wins in the third battle effect. Is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) following the third battle effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the effect of holding the second special figure is given as an example, but the effect of holding the first special figure may be used.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E8-1]
It is possible to suspend the lottery for winning the ball when the ball enters the starting port, perform pre-reading to determine in advance whether or not the ball hits the starting port, and perform a pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-reading. , A gaming machine that can be executed prior to the digestion of the hold.
When a predetermined number of holds exists, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notification effect that notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds as the look-ahead effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1.
The look-ahead notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds in the fluctuation of digesting the first hold when the predetermined number of holds exists.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1 or aspect E8-2.
When a predetermined number of holds exists, it is possible to execute a fluctuation notification effect that notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds in each variation corresponding to the predetermined number of holds.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3.
The predetermined number of holds is generated by entering the ball into the starting port in an advantageous game in which the ball is easily entered into the starting port.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4.
If there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds, the hit is notified by the look-ahead notification effect, and the undigested hold in the past than the hit hold is digested after the hit notification.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5.
If there is no hit in the predetermined number of holds, the loss is notified by the look-ahead notification effect, and the undigested hold is digested after the loss notification.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol display area effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. This decorative symbol display area effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol display area effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern display area production A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with the symbol "128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in the second display area R21 (second area) which is larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, a specific image TG1 (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper center position. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is variablely displayed in the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is changed according to the specific image TG1 is an image of the symbol "2" that is one before the symbol "3" that is the winning symbol, and is one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so that a part thereof overlaps with the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect B. In the decorative symbol display area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with the symbol "128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in the second display area R21 (second area) which is larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Then, when the reach state of the decorative pattern is formed, the specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper center position. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is variablely displayed in the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is changed according to the specific image TG1 is an image of the symbol "2" that is one before the symbol "3" that is the winning symbol, and is one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Then, on the display screen 7a, the display of the first display area R11 disappears (the first display area R11 is hidden).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with the symbol "128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in the second display area R21 (second area) which is larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper center position. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is variablely displayed in the first display area R11. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11 and the first display area R11 are enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is changed according to the specific image TG1 is an image of the symbol "2" that is one before the symbol "3" that is the winning symbol, and is one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. The specific image TG1 cannot be pushed down and changed, and conversely, the specific image TG1 is pushed back from the bottom to the top by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display area R11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (missing symbol "323").

[Decorative pattern display area production D]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect D. In the decorative symbol display area effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost. It is stopped and displayed with the symbol "128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display area (first area) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, on the display screen 7a, a second display area (second area) R21 surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed. The second display area R21 is larger than the first display area R11. The second display area R21 is located at the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Further, a specific image (specific image) TG is displayed in the second display area R21 on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Will be done. Specifically, the number symbol image, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), in the second display area R21 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 moves from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper center position. Is displayed in. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is variablely displayed in the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “1”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 rides on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the intermediate decorative symbol partially overlaps the first display area R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. As a result, whether or not the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner is produced. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is changed according to the specific image TG1 is an image of the symbol "2" that is one before the symbol "3" that is the winning symbol, and is one of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “2”) of the first display area R11 from above. When pushed downward, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are prevented from being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern display area effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, decorations that are variablely displayed in the first display area R11 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. The first effect in which the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (a set of decorative symbols) form a reach state, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Of these, the second effect of varying the intermediate decorative symbol 8C by the specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, among the intermediate decorative symbols 8C in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific symbol (this embodiment). In the form, when the number "2" symbol image) is changed by the specific image TG1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, which are in a reach state, reach the second display area R21 (second area) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The third effect of displaying 8R can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Appears to move to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the reach-state decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display area R21 are the first. It is displayed in a larger size than when it is displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, when the reach state 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed in the second display area R21, the first The display area R11 is hidden. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, in the first effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state in the first display area R11, the first display area R11 and A set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11 are enlarged and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display area R21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern display area effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it is made to be changed according to the displayed specific image TG1, all the decorative symbols may be changed according to the specific image, not a part of a set of decorative symbols.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is pushed and changed by the specific image TG1 from top to bottom. For example, the decorative symbol is crushed and changed, lifted from bottom to top and changed, or collided and broken. It may be varied as follows. That is, the decorative pattern may be changed in any manner depending on the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed so as to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. For example, in the first display area R11. The displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily hidden and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the specific symbol in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is an image of the symbol "2", which is one before the symbol "3", which is the winning symbol. The symbol of may be a specific symbol here. For example, it may be a symbol of another number, or it may be a special symbol other than the number.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the reach-state decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display area R21 are displayed in a larger size than when they are displayed in the first display area. , The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reach state displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a mode different from the mode displayed in the first display area. For example, they may be displayed in different colors and shapes, different types of patterns, and the like.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns.
In the first region of the display means, the first effect in which the set of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed form a reach state
A second effect of varying at least one of the set of decorative symbols in the reach state in the first region of the display means according to a specific image displayed on the display means is executed. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1.
When a specific symbol among the at least one decorative symbol in the first region of the display means is changed by the specific image, the set of decorative symbols reachable to the second region of the display means. It is possible to further execute the third effect of displaying
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2.
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed so as to move from the first region to the second region.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2 or aspect F1-3.
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state displayed in the second area is displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first area.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4.
In the third effect, when the set of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed in the second area, the first area is hidden.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5.
In the first effect, when the set of decorative symbols forms a reach state in the first region, the set of the reach state displayed in the first region and the first region. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6.
The first region of the display means is included in the second region.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold-supporting image effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. This hold-supporting image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold compatible image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Holding compatible image production A]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the hold-corresponding image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Further, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and only the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the pedestal image 9AT and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A are displayed. The reserved image 9C is hidden when the effect symbol is stopped.

[Holding compatible image production B]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the hold-corresponding image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Further, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden, and only the hold image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. The reserved image 9C is hidden when the effect symbol is stopped.

[Holding compatible image production C]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the hold-corresponding image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Further, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden almost at the same time as the effect symbol and the final stop.

[Holding compatible image production D]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the hold-supporting image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 150A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies that the degree of expectation for a hit has increased. Here, the message image MSG "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), the pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are blue (shown with hatching). The change in the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is performed based on the degree of expectation for hitting. For example, blue has higher expectations than white, and red has higher expectations than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the hold image 9C are hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that notifies the battle effect that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8". Further, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A is displayed. The reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden almost at the same time as the effect symbol and the final stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold-enabled image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved images (reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). Then, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the degree of expectation for hitting (FIGS. 147 (D), 148 (D), 149 (D), 150 (D)). ). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved images (reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change based on the degree of expectation for hitting in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for hitting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed with the execution of the chance-up effect (FIGS. 147 (C), 148 (C), 149 (C), FIG. FIG. 150 (C). According to this configuration, expectations for chance-up production are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A is hidden, and the pedestal image 9C corresponding to the hold image 9C and the hold image 9C is displayed ( FIGS. 147 (F) and 149 (F). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT become conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the hold image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image are hidden, and the hold image 9C is displayed (FIG. 148 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A and the hold image 9C are hidden, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C is displayed ( FIG. 150 (F). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden in the victory effect or the defeat effect. (FIG. 147 (G), FIG. 148 (G), FIG. 149 (G), FIG. 150 (G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be attracted to the victory or defeat of the ally character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold-enabled image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, following the chance-up effect, the pedestal change effect in which the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed is executed. On the other hand, the pedestal change effect may be executed with another effect as an opportunity. Further, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to other effects.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed as the pedestal change effect. Instead of or in addition to such a change in display color, the shapes of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT may be changed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a hold image and changing the hold image to another hold image based on the degree of expectation for a hit.
It is possible to display a hold-compatible image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image in correspondence with the display position of the hold image.
Based on the degree of expectation for the hit, it is possible to execute a hold-corresponding image change effect that changes the hold-corresponding image into another hold-corresponding image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-1.
The hold-compatible image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-3]
A game machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2.
The hold-corresponding image change effect is executed based on the degree of expectation for the hit in the fluctuation, which is the current fluctuation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3.
The hold-corresponding image change effect is executed when a specific effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4.
The hold image includes the hold image corresponding to the change, which is the current change, and the hold storage image indicating the number of holds.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G1-5.
The hold-compatible image includes the hold-support image corresponding to the hold image and the hold storage-compatible image corresponding to the hold storage image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a first display effect in which the hold storage image and the hold storage compatible image are hidden and the hold image and the hold support image are displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6 or aspect G1-7.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a second display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, and the hold support image and displaying the hold image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a third display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, and the hold image and displaying the hold support image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G1-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9.
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a fourth display effect that hides the hold storage image, the hold storage compatible image, the hold image, and the hold support image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The reserved image effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. This reserved image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Hold image production A]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), the pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, the message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold is hidden, and only the hold image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed. Here, in particular, both the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Here, too, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C related to the first special figure reservation are hidden.

[Hold image production B]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), the pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, the message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the hold image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A regarding the first special figure hold are hidden, and the hold image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Hold image production C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (C), the pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, the message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden, and the hold image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. Here, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought. Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden, and the hold image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Hold image production D]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and a pedestal image 9CT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), the pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-ream notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a pseudo-ream. Here, the message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start high-speed fluctuation again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), the ring effect is executed. The ring production is a production performed when a ally character and an enemy character fight in a battle production. Specifically, the band-shaped ring image RG rotates around the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB as shown by the arrow YG. Here, the character "extreme heat" is displayed on the ring image RG, and the character "extreme heat" also moves as the ring image RG rotates. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. On the other hand, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is on the back side of the ring image RG and is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed. Here, in particular, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Here, too, the hold image 9A relating to the first special figure hold, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A, the hold image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C are hidden.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold image 9A and the hold image 9C are displayed in the variable effect of the effect symbol in the first period (FIGS. 151 (A) (B) (C) (D)), the hold image 9A Includes a second period (FIGS. 151 (E) (F)) in which is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. According to this configuration, the reserved image can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable effect of the effect symbol includes a third period (FIGS. 151 (G) (H)) in which both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are hidden. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not paying attention to the reserved information during this period.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT can be displayed corresponding to the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152, 153, 154). ). According to this configuration, the display position of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed in the first period of displaying the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C. (FIGS. 152 (A) (B) (C) (D), FIG. 153 (A) (B) (C) (D), FIG. 154 (A) (B) (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the display position of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed (FIG. 152 (FIG. 152). E) (F), FIG. 154 (E)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. It can be displayed (FIGS. 153 (E) (F) and 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect of displaying the ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the held image 9C. (Fig. 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the reserved image effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the order was 1st period → 2nd period → 3rd period, but each period may appear in any order during the variation effect. Further, it may be included twice or more during the variation effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute a ring effect of displaying the ring image RG displayed on the back side of the hold image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the hold image 9C. In this ring effect, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the hold image 9A and the hold image 9A may be displayed. At this time, it is conceivable that the ring image is displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9A and on the front side of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying the hold image corresponding to the change, which is the current change, and the hold storage image indicating the number of holds as the hold image.
During the variation of the effect symbol, it is possible to execute the hold image change effect including the first period in which both the hold image and the hold storage image are displayed and the second period in which only the hold image is displayed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-1.
The hold image change effect further includes a third period in which both the hold image and the hold storage image are not displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-1 or the aspect G2-2.
It is possible to display a hold-compatible image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the hold image in correspondence with the display position of the hold image.
The hold-compatible image includes the hold-support image corresponding to the hold image and the hold storage-compatible image corresponding to the hold storage image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G2-3.
The hold-compatible image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3 or aspect G2-4.
In the first period, the hold-compatible image can be displayed in correspondence with the hold image, and the hold storage-compatible image can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5.
In the second period, the hold-corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the hold-holding image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6.
In the second period, only the reserved image can be displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect G2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7.
When it overlaps with the hold image, it is displayed on the back side of the hold image, and when it overlaps with the hold support image, a special image displayed on the front side of the hold support image is displayed. Feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the disappearance effects A to D of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. In FIGS. 155 to 158, some decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing, and the periphery of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged in the above are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The disappearance effect of the hold icon can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) and includes an instruction to execute the disappearance effect of the hold icon. , The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 and the like. The position and light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon will be described, and then the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon will be described in order. In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, the hold icon is hidden (disappears) as described later, so that the display gives a sense of discomfort. It is a production that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high.

[Disappearance effect A of the hold icon]
First, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect A of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the hold icon 9C (blue in this case) of a smiling sphere is displayed at the hidden hold display position 9Cd, and a white spherical hold is held at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. The icons are displayed, respectively, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 155 (A).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 155 (A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number " (Temporarily stopped at "3"), the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, and a reach is formed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is also continuously hidden in FIG. 155 (A). Has been done. In addition, a number HMG (here, a number HMG indicating a first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and a second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “20”) is also continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The number HMG (here, "20") indicating the figure hold is continuously displayed in FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B), and the two hold icons displayed in FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B). 9A, the hold icon 9C and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the hold display position 9Cd appears and is newly displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed, which corresponds to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. The hold display position 9Cd appears when the hold icon 9C disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (D), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, "2") is displayed following FIG. 155 (C). 0 ”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (E), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production is performed to hunt down the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are used. Is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (F), in the middle stage of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left, and the numbers are continued from FIG. 155 (E). The HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (G), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "victory". Message MG is placed and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA, and with regard to hold, the number HMG (here, "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (F), whereas the hold is concerned. The display position 9Cd is hidden (disappeared). If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. Arranged and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "3"). , A big hit game (big hit production) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a big hit. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (G), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (it is hidden).

When the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2" on the display screen 7a. , If the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and the same symbol (here, the number "3") is not aligned and is stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (G), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position. 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and white spherical hold icons are displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed. At the position 9Ad, the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the digestion of the hold icon due to the confirmed display of disconnection.

As described above, in the hold icon disappearance effect A, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 155 (A) and (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, a specific effect is given. During the period (FIGS. 155 (C) to (G)), the player is provided with a novel effect of showing / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Disappearance effect B of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect B of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the hold icon 9C (blue in this case) of a smiling sphere is displayed at the hidden hold display position 9Cd, and a white spherical hold is held at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. The icons are displayed, respectively, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in stock without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 156 (A).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 156 (A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number " (Temporarily stopped at "3"), the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, and a reach is formed. The hold icon 9A is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is also continuously hidden in FIG. 156 (A). In addition, a number HMG (here, a number HMG indicating a first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and a second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21). “20”) is also continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A). The hold icon 9C is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), and is displayed as a mode in which light is also emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C in all directions.

The hold icon 9C in FIG. 156 (B) may be the same as the hold icon 9C (blue in this case) in FIG. 156 (A), or changes to one with a high expectation of becoming a big hit (for example, blue). It may be changed from to green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The number HMG (here, "20") indicating the figure hold is continuously displayed in FIGS. 156 (A) and 156 (B), and the two hold icons displayed in FIGS. 156 (A) and 156 (B). 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9C in all directions is also continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (B). That is, with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, "20"), the hold display position 9Cd, and the light from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C are displayed in all directions.

The hold icon 9C in FIG. 156 (C) may be the same as the hold icon 9C (blue or green here) in FIG. 156 (B), and is changed to one with a high expectation of becoming a big hit. (For example, it may be changed from blue to green or from green to red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The number HMG (here, “20”) indicating the figure hold is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (C), and from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9C displayed in FIG. 156 (C). The light emitted in all directions is displayed in such a manner that the size increases while moving from the hold display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a (or, it moves from the hold display position to the display screen 7a and turns in the front-back direction. It is displayed in a mode in which the size increases while rotating). Further, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C in the center of the inner region of the outer shell of the hold icon 9C displayed in large size, the effect button 63 The effect button image BTN imitating the above is arranged and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. Further, in the inner region of the outer shell of the hold icon 9C displayed in large size, below the effect button image BTN, the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C). A timer bar TB indicating (3 seconds) is displayed. As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

Further, in FIG. 156 (D), the hold display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”), the large display of the hold icon 9C, and the light emitted from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C in all directions are shown in FIG. 156 (C). ) Continues to be displayed, and the hold display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. That is, the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of appearing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 156 (E), the left movable accessory 14L The right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position of the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction close to each other), and advances (moves) toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. One decorative member (combined accessory) in which the right decorative portion, which is half of the decorative portion of the shape, is united, and the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. Is formed.

In FIG. 156 (E), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”), the hold display position 9Cd, the large display hold icon 9C, and the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C The light emitted in all directions is displayed continuously in FIG. 156 (D), and corresponds to the reserved display position 9Cd and the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. The hold icon 9C and the like are in a state of appearing.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the combined accessory is formed in the annular shape as shown in FIG. 156 (F). The region to be formed is a region having a circular shape (hereinafter, referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere displayed in large size is already arranged in FIG. 156 (D), and the hold icon 9C is placed. By making the icon 9C an image expressing the emotion of a smile on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with respect to the circular region 14D of the combined accessory (that is, the hold icon 9C is an image expressing the emotion of the combined accessory). It disappears), and it is possible to give emotion to the united character. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

In addition, in FIG. 156 (F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (E), and the left decoration is currently changing. The hold icon 9C corresponding to the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears as an image expressing the emotion of the united accessory.

Further, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and move to the left side. When the left decorative portion of the movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the combined accessory is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since a part of 9Cd (the upper part of the holding display position 9Cd) is covered, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the holding display position 9Cd.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

When the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move, respectively, the hold display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIGS. 156 (E) and 156 (F). It has become like.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (G), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed for the hold. ) And the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 156 (H), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd Is displayed continuously in FIG. 156 (G).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. Again, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "" 20 ”) and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and "defeated". Message MG is placed and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB, and regarding hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position are continued from the middle of the action production (battle production) (not shown). 9Cd is displayed. If an effect is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and the message MG of "victory" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. Arranged and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3" on the display screen 7a, which are the same symbols. If (here, the number "3") is not aligned and the stop display is displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position. 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and white spherical hold icons are displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed. At position 9Ad, the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the digestion of the hold icon due to the confirmed display of disconnection.

In addition, when the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol on the display screen 7a ( Here, the numbers "3") are all stopped and displayed, and a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed in which the player is given a profit as a jackpot. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears (is hidden) from the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the hold icon disappearance effect B, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to (E)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, it is a specific effect. During the period (FIGS. 156 (F) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect of displaying / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Disappearance effect C of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect C of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image are displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively. The hold icon is not displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 157 (A).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 157 (A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), light is emitted from the center of the white spherical holding icon 9C in all directions and a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). Flashes only, the flash image FH is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (A), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C Is displayed in a variable manner and a reach is formed. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (B), and the two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 157 (B) are newly hidden, and the hold icon is displayed. 9C is in a state of being hidden following FIG. 157 (B). That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, with half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left decorative part and the right movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (D), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (C), and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory are movable in order to form the combined accessory. When the accessory 14R and the accessory 14R start to move, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (C) is newly hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. (Front) The movable accessory 14R on the right side moves backward (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the movable accessory 14R on the right side moves from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the hold display that was hidden in FIG. 157 (D) is accompanied by this. Position 9Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157 (E), the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (D) with respect to the hold.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (F), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (E) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157 (F), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (E). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 157 (G), the left movable accessory 14L The right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position of the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction close to each other), and advances (moves) toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are united to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, and the combined accessory is formed in the ring. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with sunglasses is displayed. By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (G), regarding hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (F), and the hold display position 9Cd is continuously hidden in FIG. 157 (F). Will be in a state of

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (H), the left movable accessory 14L is the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. (Front) The movable accessory 14R on the right side moves backward (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the movable accessory 14R on the right side moves from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the hold display that was hidden in FIG. 157 (G) is accompanied by this. Position 9Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157 (H), the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (G) with respect to the hold.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (I), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (H) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157 (I), with respect to hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (H). The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157 (I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157 (F), and the expectation of a big hit is high. It may be changed to something (for example, changing from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 157 (J), the left decoration is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols (here, the number "3") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed. The loss is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed following FIG. 157 (I), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the third 4 Hold display position 9Ad is displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. , The hold icon is not displayed, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears. The hold icon 9C is digested and the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) with the confirmation display of disconnection.

In FIG. 157 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (in this case, the number "3"), and a big hit is obtained. , A jackpot game (big hit production) that gives profits to the player will be performed. In this case, regarding the hold, in FIG. 157 (J), the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd continues to disappear in FIG. 157 (I) ( It becomes a state (disappears).

In this way, in the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 157 (A) to (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, a specific effect is given. During the period (FIGS. 157 (C) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect of displaying / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Disappearance effect D of the hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect D of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect D of the hold icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively. It is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two hold icons 9A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 158 (A).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 158 (A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), a flash image in which light is emitted from the center of the hold icon 9C in the shape of a yellow (gold) star in all directions. FH is displayed and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (A), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "3" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C Is displayed in a variable manner and a reach is formed. At this time, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 (here). Then, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (B), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (B).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (D), the area of the display screen 7a becomes a pseudo abnormal display mode. Examples of the "pseudo-abnormal display mode" include a display mode such as a sandstorm, a display mode in which the screen is disturbed by noise, a display mode in which the image is not normally displayed due to processing delay, and an alternative display mode in which the original screen cannot be returned. A display mode in which a message for displaying the effect is displayed can be mentioned.

In FIG. 158 (D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo abnormal display mode, the first special figure hold and the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 The numbers HMG (here, "20") indicating the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the ball are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (C) and displayed in FIG. 158 (C). The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are newly hidden, and the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158 (C) is also newly hidden. That is, regarding the hold, only the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed. In the pseudo-abnormal display mode, the position where the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed and the area around it may be avoided. In this way, the visibility of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is ensured. be able to.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). Advance (move), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, with half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative part and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left decorative part and the right movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with wide open eyes is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of smiling with squinting eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular region 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can have emotions. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of productions based on the emotions of the united characters.

In addition, in FIG. 158 (E), regarding hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (D).

After that, although not shown, the left movable accessory 14L is located at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. Moves backward (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the movable accessory 14R on the right side advances to the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the position toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to release the formed combined accessory, the reserved display position 9Cd, which is not shown, is not shown. Will reappear. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (F), the message MG "It is a big hit by winning the ally character !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, "20") is displayed for the hold. ) And the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (E).

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (G), almost the whole body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. In the initial stage of action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and the production is performed to hunt down the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") and the hold display position 9Cd Is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (F).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. Again, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "" 20 ”) and the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (H), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is used to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. Is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158 (G) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 158 (H), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (G). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow) based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a big hit. The expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit rich).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 158 (I), the ally character CRA wins. An effect is performed to notify, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is placed and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") Is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (H), and the hold display position 9Cd is continuously hidden (disappears) in FIG. 158 (H). If the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG of "defeat" is displayed on the enemy character CRB. It is placed and displayed on the left side of.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "3"). , A big hit game (big hit production) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a big hit. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "20") is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd is continuously disappeared (hidden) in FIG. 158 (I).

If the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed without the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. If the number "2" and the right decorative symbol 8R become the number "3" and the same symbols (here, the number "3") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (I), and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position. 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and white spherical hold icons are displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed. At the position 9Ad, the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the hold display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a by digesting the hold icon 9C with the confirmation display of disconnection.

As described above, in the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 158 (A) and 158) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, a specific effect is given. During the period (FIGS. 158 (C) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect of showing / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the disappearance effect of the hold icon is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. ), And when the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) based on the hold icon 9C is started, the hold icon 9C is displayed, and then a plurality of hold icons 9C are displayed. When the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is started before the variable display by the decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped, the hold icon 9C is displayed. The first effect to be hidden can be executed. According to this configuration, although the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 155 (A) and (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) ), The player can be provided with a novel effect of showing / hiding the hold icon 9C, which is unprecedented, that the hold icon 9C is hidden during the period of the specific effect. It can be improved.
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (J), the hold icon 9C is shown for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (E)) after the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed, but during the period when the specific effect shown in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I) is performed, the hold icon 9C is hidden, which is unprecedented display / non-display by the hold icon. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display, and to improve the interest.
In the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (J), the hold icon 9C is shown for a while (FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed, but during the period when a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I)), the hold icon 9C is hidden, which is not the case with the hold icon. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of hiding, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIGS. 158 (A) to 158 (J), although the hold icon 9C is displayed, a period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I)). )), It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / hiding the hold icon 9C, which has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A can be displayed. The first effect is that when the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started, the display is suspended in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (B). The position 9Ad is displayed, and the hold display position 9Ad is hidden during the period from the start to the end of the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G). According to this configuration, the hold display position 9Ad is hidden during the period (FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G)) in which the specific effect is performed, so that the visibility of the specific effect is reduced to the hold display position 9Ad. Since it is not hindered by the above, it is possible to suppress the loss of the powerful feeling of a specific effect.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon of FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), disappearance effect C of the hold icon of FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in).

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the first effect is a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, When the variable display by the right decorative symbol 8R) is started and stopped, the winning is notified by winning in a specific lottery (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (here, here). , The numbers "3") are aligned and stopped and displayed.) When the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is completed, the hold display position 9Ad is continuously hidden in FIG. 155 (H). On the other hand, the winners and losers in the specific lottery in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) are notified (the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is. When the number is "3" and the same symbol (here, the number "3") is not aligned and is stopped and displayed), the hold display position 9Ad is displayed although not shown after the specific effect is completed. According to this configuration, when the winning game (winning effect) is started after the winning game (winning effect) is notified as a winning in the specific lottery after the specific effect is completed, the winning game (winning effect) is held by the hold display position 9Ad. Since it is not hindered, it is possible to suppress the loss of power of the hit game (hit production). Further, even if the player is disappointed by being notified of the loss in a specific lottery, the hold display position 9Ad is displayed. Therefore, for example, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad exists. Depending on the color and shape of the hold icon 9A, the expected degree of hitting the hold icon 9A can be promptly transmitted to the player, which can contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (J), the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (J), and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the first effect is a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L). , Middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) The hold icon 9A is also hidden during the period from the start to the stop display when the hold display position 9Ad is hidden. According to this configuration, since the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) is performed, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, so that the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the hold display position 9Ad. By hiding 9A, the visibility of the specific effect is not hindered by the hold icon 9A in addition to the hold display position 9Ad, so that it is possible to further suppress the loss of the power of the specific effect. it can.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon of FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), disappearance effect C of the hold icon of FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C is set. It can be displayed, and the first effect is the hold icon during the period from the start of the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) to the stop display. During the period in which 9C is hidden (the period from FIG. 155 (C) to FIG. 155 (F)), the hold display position 9Cd can be displayed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9C is displayed while the hold icon 9C is hidden even though the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols by the hold icon 9C is started. Since the hold display position 9Cd is displayed and the display has a sense of discomfort, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the chance of winning is high. ..
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon of FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), disappearance effect C of the hold icon of FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (G) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G). Can be executed after the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started and the reach is formed. According to this configuration, the player can perform the discomfort effect in which the hold icon 9C is hidden by the first effect, triggered by the formation of the reach due to the longer time of the game. Since it is possible to find out by oneself, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a sense of incongruity each time a reach occurs, and it is possible to suppress the pain even if the playing time is long.
Disappearance effect B of the hold icon of FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I), disappearance effect C of the hold icon of FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the disappearance effect of the hold icon.
[Modification 1]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the hold icon 9C is It was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared), a dedicated sound for notifying the player that the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a may be played from the speaker 67. .. By doing so, the player can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking that the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the hold icon 9C is displayed with a sense of incongruity that it is hidden (disappeared).

[Modification 2]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the hold icon 9C is It was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display screen 7a disappears (disappears), a countdown effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. As a countdown effect, for example, a number "5", a number "4", a number "3", a number "2", a number "1", and a number "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the sound (announcement) of reading out the numbers may be played from the speaker 67. By doing so, the player can grasp the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking it. As a result, it is possible to inform the player when the hold icon 9C is displayed with a sense of incongruity depending on the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears).

[Modification 3]
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (D) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (H), the effect button 63 is pressed in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. The imitated effect button image BTN was arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. However, instead of the BTN that the effect button follows, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode in order to encourage the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation). The effect button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. By doing so, it is possible to give variation to the effect by changing the type of operation method, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in operation motivation even if the time for playing the game is long.

[Modification example 4]
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is the image display device 7. It was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change. When it is displayed and a reach is formed, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C are image display devices. In some cases, it disappeared from the display screen 7a of 7. However, once the reach is formed, only the hold display position 9Cd may be displayed on the display screen 7a thereafter.
[Modification 6]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative symbol 8L, When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, even if one or both of the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A and the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Good.

[Modification 7]
One of the effects described in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, FIG. 156, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, FIG. 157, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, and FIG. 158, the disappearance effect D of the hold icon. It does not have to have a part, and other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
When the variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols based on the hold icon is started, the hold icon is displayed, and when a specific effect is started before the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped, the hold The first effect of hiding the icon is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G3-1.
It is possible to display the hold display position that indicates the display position of the hold icon,
In the first effect, the hold display position is displayed when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started, and the hold display position is hidden in the period from the start to the end of the specific effect. To do
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2.
In the first effect, when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started and stopped, when the winner is notified as a winner in a specific lottery, the hold display position is continued after the specific effect is completed. On the other hand, when the winner is notified in a specific lottery and the winner is notified, the hold display position is displayed after the specific effect is completed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G3-2 or the aspect G3-3.
In the first effect, the hold icon is also hidden during the period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display, during which the hold display position is hidden.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4.
It is possible to display the hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon.
In the first effect, the hold display position can be displayed during the period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display and the period in which the hold icon is hidden.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect G3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5.
The specific effect can be performed after the variation display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started and the reach is formed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold icon image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. This hold icon image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Hold icon image display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect A. In the hold icon image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. It should be noted that the subsequent effect may be performed in the state of the variable display without erasing the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (F) to 159 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (I) and 159 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect B. In the hold icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "128"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160C, a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area moves to the hold display position, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (F) to 160 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (I) and 160 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect C. In the hold icon image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. It should be noted that the subsequent effect may be performed in the state of the variable display without erasing the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D) and 161 (E), the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to protrude upward from the back (back side) of the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (G) to 161 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right.

[Hold icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image display effect D. In the hold icon image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. It should be noted that the subsequent effect may be performed in the state of the variable display without erasing the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents the face of a smile. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (D) and 162 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right of the first hold display area is imitated. The held icon image HAG is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the hold icon image HAG moves diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area. Is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to protrude diagonally upward to the right from behind (back side) of the hold icon 9A. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a goes around in a clockwise direction so as to draw an ellipse in the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 disappears on the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after being displayed during the hold icon image display effect, or the display may be disappeared at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (G) to 162 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving to the right.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) on the display screen 7a. After the effect and the first effect, a second hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to produce and perform. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the second effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon). It is displayed to move from the position of 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the second effect, a third effect in which the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move in the display screen 7a is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the third effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. The fourth effect can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the fourth effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. The fifth effect can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 the hold display position is the hold display position, and the hold icon is the hold icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the second effect is when a specific effect (for example, display of a specific image TG2, start of next variation of a decorative symbol, etc.) is performed. Is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold icon image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is a diamond, but the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) may have various other shapes, patterns, colors, and the like. The same applies to the hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a when a specific effect (for example, display of the specific image TG2, start of the next variation of the decorative symbol, etc.) is performed, but the specific image is specified. The production may be various other productions. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may form a reach state, a specific image may be displayed, a movable member or the like may operate, and the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, one hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, but the number of hold image HAGs displayed may be plural. .. Further, the hold icon image HAG having the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but is displayed in a different size, which is larger or smaller than the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). May be done.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a has moved clockwise in the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse, but the hold icon image HAG has been moved around. However, the mode of movement in the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and may be moved in various modes. For example, the hold icon image HAG may be moved while rotating.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the display means, the first effect of displaying the hold icon at a predetermined hold display position and
After the first effect, the display means can execute a second effect in which a hold icon image imitating the hold icon displayed at the hold display position is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-1.
In the second effect, the hold icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the hold icon displayed at the hold display position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-1 or the aspect G4-2.
After the second effect, it is possible to further perform a third effect in which the hold icon image is displayed so as to move within the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-3.
After the third effect, it is possible to further perform a fourth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if it were moved from inside the display means to outside the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect G4-4.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further perform a fifth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if it were moved from the outside of the display means into the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5.
The hold display position is the hold display position.
The hold icon is the hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect G4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6.
The second effect is executed when a specific effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation state suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. This operation state suggestion display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation state suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Operation status suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect A. In the operation unit state suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 163 (F) and 163 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number symbol image of the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable mode in which the number moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 163 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is a normal number. Operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image that is not the symbol image of, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. In the operation state suggestion image SSG, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from the state where the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the above state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third). Aspects). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63. You may.

[Operation status suggestion display effect B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect B. In the operation unit state suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (in the present embodiment, the symbol image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number "6" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 164 (F) and 164 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number symbol image of the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable mode in which the number moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 164 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is a normal number. Operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image that is not the symbol image of, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a sword image KG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG showing the appearance of the sword button 65. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state in which the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). The operation state suggestion image SSG is a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen), that is, a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. It suggests that. At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 is melted and the sword member 64 is exposed. Operation state suggestion image The SSG is in a state where the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted, that is, in a state where the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. It is suggested that the operation of 64 is switched to the valid state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice, so that the sword member 64 can be pushed in, that is, the operation of the sword member 64 is effective (No. 3). At this time, when the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the sword image KG and the timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed in front of the sword image KG. In addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "push in !!") that encourages the player to operate the sword member 64. You may.

[Operation status suggestion display effect C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect C. In the operation unit state suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 165 (F) and 165 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number symbol image of the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable mode in which the number moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 165 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is a normal number. Operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image that is not the symbol image of, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (H), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (I), after the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. In the operation state suggestion image SSG, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from the state where the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the above state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third). Aspects). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63. You may.

[Operation status suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion effect D. In the operation unit state suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the stop display position (missing symbol "835"). ”) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the number "3" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the number “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. .. Specifically, the number symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" symbol image stops at the stop display position while slowly slowing down the movement speed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 166 (F) and 166 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number symbol image of the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable mode in which the number moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 166 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is a normal number. Operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image that is not the symbol image of, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a lost manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative symbol 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative symbols in the lost state (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R).

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image suggesting the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing a state in which the effect button 63 is inside the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective (No. 1). 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A of the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also, the remaining hold icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. On the other hand, on the right decorative symbol 8R, the operation state suggestion image SSG is continuously displayed from the previous fluctuation. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. In the operation state suggestion image SSG, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from the state where the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the above state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed, and the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R. To. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not contained in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third). Aspects). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in an effective state.

In the present embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of "press !!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63. You may.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation state suggestion display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an operation unit image (button image BG, sword image KG) representing an operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64), and the operation unit. After the first effect in which the operation state suggestion image SSG suggesting the operation state of (operation button 63, sword member 64) is displayed in the first aspect and the first effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is first. After the second effect displayed in the second aspect different from the first aspect and the second effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in the first aspect and the third aspect different from the second aspect. It is possible to carry out the third effect to be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, in the first aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG, the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not effective. The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG is to operate the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) from a state in which the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not effective. Suggests that the operation state is switched to the effective state, and the third aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is in the effective state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first effect is the first aspect as at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is in a lost state. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are as follows from the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is executed across fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, and the second effect and the third effect are executed. The effect is executed at the time of the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation state suggestion display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation unit images are the button image BG and the sword image KG representing the operation button 63 and the sword member 64, but are images representing other operation units (lever, handle, touch panel, etc.). You may.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lost state, but may be displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L or the intermediate decorative symbol. It may be displayed as 8C.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lost state, but a plurality of decorative symbols such as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. It may be displayed as, or it may be displayed as all decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the three aspects of the operation state suggestion image SSG are the effectiveness of the operation of the operation unit (the operation is not valid, the operation is switched from the ineffective state to the valid state, and the operation is effective. However, it may be a mode that suggests, for example, how to operate the operation unit, the direction of operation, and the like.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect H1-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation state suggestion image that includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit and suggests an operation state of the operation unit.
The first effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a second aspect different from the first aspect,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect and a third aspect different from the second aspect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-1.
The first aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is not effective.
The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is switched from the ineffective state to the operation of the operation unit is valid.
The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in an effective state.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-1 or the aspect H1-2.
In the first effect, the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect as at least a part of the decorative symbol in a lost state.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3.
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are executed from the variation of the decorative symbol to the next variation.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-4.
The first effect is executed when the decorative pattern changes.
The second effect and the third effect are executed at the time of the next variation of the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H1-5.
The second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbol is started.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation image stock effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. In FIGS. 167 to 170, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also viewed. Some are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This operation image stock effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image stock effect, the corresponding image is displayed from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position of 14R and the light emitting mode are changed.

Here, the operation image stock effect A will be described first, and the operation image stock effect B, the operation image stock effect C, and the operation image stock effect D will be described in order.

[Operation image stock production A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect A. The operation image stock effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect A, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 167 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and one of the button image BGs has a character image of "long press". Above the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) placed at the bottom, the button image BG with the character image "long press" is placed as the second from the bottom. In this state, the two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached do not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, the normal button image as the third from the bottom is above the button image BG with the character image of "long press" arranged second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. The BG is arranged, and the sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are three button image BGs (two normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "long press") and one sword. The image KG and the image KG are arranged. The number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) indicates the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) increases. It is supposed to be.

The button image BG with the character image "long press" has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63). It is set high. Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached. That is, the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further, compared to this normal button image BG. It is higher than the button image BG with the character image of "long press" which is set high. Further, three button image BGs (two normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "long press") and one sword image arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. KG is a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (E) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 167 (F), the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed. When the button image BG with the character image "long press" stocked on the right side of is digested and the button image BG with the character image "long press" disappears from the display screen 7a, " A button image BG with a character image of "long press" is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed on the upper left side in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps the lower front surface thereof. , The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "long press" prompting a long press operation (continuation of the press operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. It should be noted that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (F) is accompanied by the character image "long press" when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (for example). It may be (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red).

When the player presses and holds the effect button 63 (continuation of the pressing operation) during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is generated as the long pressing operation sound. The sound continuously flows from the speaker 67.

When the player presses and holds the effect button 63 (continuation of the pressing operation) during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the figure shows. As shown in 167 (G), subsequently, when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button is accompanied by this. An image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (G) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 167 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the screen (located at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large sword image KG. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. Further, the sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (H) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking) It may be changed).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is heard. A specific sound, which is a different sound and announces the confirmation of hit, flows from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 167 (I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen. Along with being displayed on the 7a, a hit confirmation effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints on the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. Stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting with (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is used. The stop display is displayed and a hit (big hit or small hit) is made, and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In addition, in FIG. 167 (H), when the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, FIG. 167 (I). When the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as the background image shown in the above, the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation). Along with this, a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and following FIG. 167 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each display their own variations. In the area, the middle point on the left side and the middle point on the right side of the display screen 7a are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction), and the same pattern (here, the number "7") is stopped and displayed. The loss will be confirmed and displayed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). ..

In this way, in the operation image stock effect A, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG, button image BG with the character image "long press") on the right side of the display screen 7a. When these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and a hit (big hit or small hit) is generated. Since the result of whether or not to do so (the winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. it can.

[Operation image stock production B]
Next, the operation image stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect B. The operation image stock effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect B, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 168 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and a normal button is placed above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom, and is the second from the bottom. Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168 (C). In the button get effect, two button image BGs imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. It will be a reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. One of the two button image BGs obtained has a character image of "continuous hit" attached to the button image BG. In addition, the character image "sword" is attached to the handle of the obtained sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image of "continuous hitting" is attached do not have the character image of "button" attached at all. Here, the normal button image BG is placed above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is placed second from the bottom, and the normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom. A button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" is placed above the image BG, and a sword image KG is placed above the button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" as the fourth from the bottom. Will be done.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button image BGs (three normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") and one sword image. KG and are in a state of being arranged. The number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) indicates the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) increases. It is supposed to be.

The button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63). The expectation is the same as or about the same as the expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image "continuous hit" shown in FIG. 167 (B). The degree of expectation (the degree of expectation that is slightly lower or slightly higher than the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit"). Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "continuous hit" is attached. That is, the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further, compared to this normal button image BG. It is higher than the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" which is set high. Further, four button image BGs (three normal button image BGs and one button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (E) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (F), subsequently, FIG. When the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (F) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (G), subsequently, FIG. 168 ( When the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) in D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (G) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed. When the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" stocked on the right side of is digested and the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, "continuous hit" is accompanied by this. The button image BG to which the character image is attached is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "continuous striking" is displayed, which prompts a continuous striking operation (continuous operation of pressing operation) of the effect button 63. It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (H) is attached with the character image "continuous hit" when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue). It may be blinking) or lit in green (changed to blinking green).

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation) during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds), each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) as a continuous pressing operation sound. The first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67.

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (I), subsequently. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (located at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG becomes large in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. Further, the sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (I) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking) It may be changed).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly. The second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound), or a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit). ) May be.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, as shown in FIG. 168 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display area. .. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. (Here, the number "7") is not aligned and the stop display is displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation) in FIG. 168 (I), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the operation is accompanied by this. A specific sound different from the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and announcing the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen. In addition to being displayed on the 7a, a hit confirmation effect may be performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning. When the rainbow image and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed in their own variable display areas, respectively, and the midpoint on the left side of the display screen 7a. The same symbol (here, the number "7") is lined up in a line connecting the midpoint of the right side and the center line in the left-right direction, and the stop display is displayed, and the hit (big hit or small hit) is confirmed. After that, the production (big hit production and small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game and small hit game) will be started.

In this way, in the operation image stock effect B, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG, button image BG with the character image "continuous hit") on the right side of the display screen 7a. When these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and a hit (big hit or small hit) is generated. Since the result of whether or not (the winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. ..

[Operation image stock production C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect C. The operation image stock effect C is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect C, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 169 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, three button image BGs are obtained, and the normal button as the second from the bottom is above the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom. An image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged, and a normal button image BG (that is, the effect button 63 is simply placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom as the third from the bottom). Three button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the imitated button image BG) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In some cases, an effect of retreating the ally character CRA due to an attack from the enemy character CRB may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have a character image of "button" at all. Here, the normal button image BG as the fourth from the bottom is arranged above the normal button image BG which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is arranged third from the bottom, and this normal button Above the image BG, the sword image KG is placed as the fifth from the bottom. In addition, in FIG. 169 (C), when the button loss effect described later is developed (started) due to the retreat of the ally character CRA due to the attack from the enemy character CRB, the effect button 63 already obtained (acquired) is imitated. The button image BG and the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 64 are lost, and various images (button image BG and sword image KG) that are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a are displayed from the bottom to the top. Only one or more will disappear from the display screen 7a.

In this way, four button image BGs (four normal button image BGs and one sword image KG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a (various stocked images (). The number of button image BG and sword image KG (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) indicates the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). As the number of button images BG and sword image KG (that is, the total number of stocks of various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) increases.

The sword image KG has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the normal button image BG. Further, the four button image BGs (four normal button image BGs) and the one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (E), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (F), the button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA recedes due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (E). In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 obtained (acquired) by the button get effect and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost and are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Only one or more of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) disappear from the display screen 7a from the bottom to the top and are forcibly digested. Here, the button image BG arranged at the bottom in FIG. 169 (D) and the button image BG arranged second from the bottom disappear.

In addition, in FIG. 169 (E), the action effect (battle effect) may not be developed again. In this case, the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the two button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, a timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message "press" prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, even if the image is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking)) Good. When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the above-mentioned pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again, and the player When the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (G), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. In some cases, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), the button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA recedes due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (G). Here, in FIG. 169 (D), the button image BG arranged third from the bottom and the button image BG arranged fourth from the bottom disappear and are forcibly digested. After that, the sword image KG arranged at the top in FIG. 169 (D) changes from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking). In addition, in FIG. 169 (G), when the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed, the button get effect is developed (started) accordingly.

Further, in FIG. 169 (H), the sword image KG may not change from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the pressing promotion effect may be developed (started). is there. In this case, the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the message "Push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so that the sword image KG overlaps the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be changed (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking) to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (I).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. A hit confirmation effect that is displayed large in is performed. At this time, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints on the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. Stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting with (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167 (I) and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, that is, in FIG. 169 (H). The sword image KG does not change from a predetermined light emitting mode to another light emitting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the stocked sword image KG (arranged at the top) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When it disappears from the screen 7a, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is not played at all from the speaker 67, and the sword image KG is displayed in the central part of the display screen 7a as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting mode. To. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the message "Push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so that the sword image KG overlaps the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking)). When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation). Along with this, a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed in their own variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a. In some cases, the same symbol (here, the number "7") is lined up in a line connecting the midpoint on the right side and the center line in the left-right direction, and is stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed. is there. Even if the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is the same as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) in the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 and the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168. It may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from a specific sound).

In this way, in the operation image stock effect C, in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, the sword image KG (the light emission mode of the sword image KG changes from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking. (Changes) are stocked, and when these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and a hit (big hit or small hit). Since the result of whether or not a hit) occurs (the hit confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, the interest is improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained by obtaining various images (button image BG and sword image KG) by the button get effect (that is, the total number of stocked various images (that is, the total number of stocked various images) The number of stocks)) can be increased, and the button image BG and the sword image KG can be lost due to the button loss effect. That is, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) can be increased or decreased. ing. As a result, the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) is hit (big hit or small hit). It is possible to eliminate monotony by changing the degree of expectation.

[Operation image stock production D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect D. The operation image stock effect D is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock effect D, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 170 (A). In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 170 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and a normal button is placed above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom, and is the second from the bottom. Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

As described above, two button image BGs (two normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked two-button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit). That is, as the number of stocked button image BGs (that is, the total number of button image BGs stocked (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) increases.

Two button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a (normal button image BG has a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). The "predetermined light emitting mode" is a hit (big hit or Based on the expectation (small hit), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)) In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit), it is called white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)) The expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in order is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the two button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (C) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (D), subsequently, FIG. 170 ( When the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in B) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (D) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (E), subsequently, although not shown, , Action production (battle production) is developed, and button get production is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. It will be a reward for action production (battle production). As shown in FIG. 170 (F), the obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image of "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have a character image of "button" at all. Here, since the two button image BGs already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been digested, the sword image KG is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom as the second from the bottom. Be placed.

In addition, in FIG. 170 (E), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the action effect (battle effect) is performed. The button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without being expanded, and as shown in FIG. 170 (F), the display screen. It may be stacked and displayed on the right side of 7a and stocked.

As described above, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) suggest the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits). In other words, as the number of various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) increases, the degree of expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) increases. It is supposed to be.

The sword image KG has a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the normal button image BG. Further, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (G), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (G) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (H), the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the screen (located at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner in which a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower part of the front surface. , The timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. Further, the sword image KG displays a message MG of "push in !!" prompting the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (H) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking) It may be changed).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is heard. A specific sound, which is a different sound and announces the hit confirmation, flows from the speaker 67, and further, as shown in FIG. 170 (I), the hit confirmation effect is performed. Here, as a hit confirmation effect, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. (Move), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. , The right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, is united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having a ring shape is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode. At the same time, the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, and an effect suggesting the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example,). Due to another light emitting mode (for example, red light emitting mode) different from the white light emitting mode), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have a red light emitting mode, but the alphabetic character "V" does not appear. , There is no production that suggests the victory of the ally character CRA.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate to cover the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate by the letter "V". The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection. In other words, the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is a display screen in which the letter "V" appears by the light guide plate. Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are emitted toward the front through the light guide plate, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In addition, in FIG. 170 (H), when the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, FIG. 170 (I) In the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D, one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape is not formed. When the ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) flows from the speaker 67. Following 170 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lines (left and right) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display area, respectively. The same symbol (here, the number "7") may not be aligned in a line (center line of the direction) and may be stopped and displayed, and the deviation may be confirmed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). ..

In this way, in the operation image stock effect D, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when the player digests these one by one, the player The effect button 63 can be operated, the player can operate the sword member 64, and the result of whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (hit is confirmed only when a hit occurs). As an effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D formed by combining the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R. Since it is possible to display (displayed) on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the operation image stock effect D, even if various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained (acquired) by the button get effect are digested by the press promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) are obtained again by the button get effect. Since it is possible to increase the number of button images BG and sword images KG), the various images that are stocked again give the player joy and give them a sense of expectation that hits (big hits and small hits) will occur. Can contribute to.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 (first operation means) that can be operated by the player A button image BG (first operating means image) that is provided with a sword member 64 (second operating means) that can be operated by the player and imitates the effect button 63 (first operating means) is the image display device 7. The first effect stocked on the display screen 7a and the sword image KG (second operating means image) imitating the sword member 64 (second operating means) are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second effect, the third effect in which the button image BG (first operation means image) stocked by the first effect is digested by the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means), and the second effect. The sword image KG (second operating means image) stocked by the production of is digested by the operation of the sword member 64 (second operating means), and the third production or the fourth production. It is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the winning result (result of whether or not a winning (big hit or small hit) occurs) in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the way. .. According to this configuration, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when digesting these, the player operates the effect button 63 or the player operates the sword member 64. In addition to being able to operate, the winning result (result of whether or not a winning (big hit or small hit) occurs) in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because of this, it is possible to improve the interest.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), operation image stock effect C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J), operation image of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J). The same applies to the stock production D.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. .. According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operation means image), the sword image KG (second operation means image) is stocked on the display screen so that the player can operate it. Since the number of objects that can be played can be increased (in other words, the number of targets that reflect the player's intention can be increased), it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the motivation for operation. In addition, the degree of expectation of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of hit (big hit or small hit)) set in the sword image KG (second operation means image) is the button image BG (second operation means image). It is preferable that the value is higher than that set in (1) Operation means image). According to this configuration, in the state where the button image BG is stocked, the player cannot expect the degree of expectation of transition to the game state (expectation of hit (big hit or small hit)) which is advantageous to the player, and the player is disappointed. Even so, when the sword image KG is stocked, it can be expected that the sword image KG is set to the degree of expectation for transition to a game state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for hit (big hit or small hit)). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
Operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), operation image stock effect C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J), operation image of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J). The same applies to the stock production D.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a hit confirmation effect for notifying the hit confirmation, and is a rainbow image which is a background image. The BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) different from the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) which is the background image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display on. According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) are suddenly switched to the hit confirmation effect, which gives an impact to the player and announces the hit confirmation. can do. As a result, the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) can be impressed on the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (second operating means) because he / she sees the hit confirmation effect that has an impact. The hit confirmation effect by the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) can contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to play.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J) and the operation image stock effect C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J), the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate with the alphabetic character “V” (first hit confirmation image). By suddenly switching to the hit confirmation effect by the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to give an impact to the player and announce the hit confirmation. .. As a result, the combination of the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) in which the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) is played. It can impress the player as a production that has an impact on the person. For this reason, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (second operating means) because he / she sees the hit confirmation effect that has an impact. The game is played by the hit confirmation effect by the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) in which the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate. It can contribute to the improvement of the player's willingness to play.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image). Since one of the rainbow images BKH (first hit confirmed image) is a background image, it is arranged backward, and the other ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) is arranged forward. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image) are suddenly switched to the hit confirmation effect, which gives an impact to the player and announces the hit confirmation. can do.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J) and the operation image stock effect C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appear on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are united. , The front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate, which is one of the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) and ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image). The character CRA (second hit confirmed image) is arranged backward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the other alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) is arranged forward. The front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appears by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is based on the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) that appear on the light guide plate. By suddenly switching to the winning confirmation effect, it is possible to give an impact to the player and announce the winning confirmation.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 is displayed on the button image BG (first operation means image). Some include a character image (operation instruction image) of "long press" instructing "long press operation (specific operation)" to (first operation means). According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), so that the player can be made monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means). By making it hard to feel, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63 (first operating means).
In the operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), the button image BG (first operation means image) is subjected to a “continuous striking operation (specification)” to the effect button 63 (first operation means). Some include a character image (operation instruction image) of "continuous hitting" instructing "operation)". According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), so that the player can be made monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means). By making it hard to feel, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63 (first operating means).

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (H) to 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a winning result (hit (big hit)) in a specific lottery. When the winning (the result of whether or not a small hit) occurs) is a winning (win (big hit or small hit)), a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is output. According to this configuration, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is played from the speaker 67, so that it is possible to inform the surroundings of the player that the player has won (a big hit or a small hit). One can immerse himself in a sense of superiority.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation image stock effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), the buttons are displayed. Along with the image BG (at the same time as the button image BG), the sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed and stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a plurality of sword image KGs may be displayed and stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It may be done. Since the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the button image BG, the player can see that the sword image KG is displayed independently on the display screen 7a. It is possible to expect the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state (expectation of hit (big hit or small hit)) that is advantageous to the player.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the hit is confirmed while the hit confirmation effect is being performed. The confirmation sound may continue to flow from the speaker 67. By doing so, the hit confirmation sound continues to flow from the speaker 67, so that it is possible to inform the surroundings of the player that the hit confirmation effect is being performed, so that the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority. it can. The hit confirmation sound may be the same as the specific sound for notifying the hit confirmation, or may be different sounds (of course, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound). It may be a different sound).

[Modification 3]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player ( The degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) was notified. However, for example, when notifying the winning result in the lottery of the number of rounds in the jackpot effect (big hit game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds which is the winning result, or the jackpot effect Transition to high-accuracy state after (big hit game) When notifying the winning result in the lottery, the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the presence or absence of the transition to the high-accuracy state, which is the winning result.

[Modification example 4]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E), 1 One sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (at the same time as one button image BG). However, a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (at the same time as one button image BG), or together with a plurality of button image BGs (at the same time as one button image BG). One sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (at the same time as the BG). By doing so, multiple button image BGs and sword image KGs will be displayed on the display screen 7a at a time, and by increasing the number of stocks, the degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit) as a winning result in a specific lottery can be obtained. Can be high.

[Modification 5]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E) are images. The button image BG and the sword image KG were digested one by one from the bottom row to the top row stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be digested one by one from the top row to the bottom row stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. The button image BG and the sword image KG arranged at any position from the top to the bottom may be arbitrarily digested, or these may be combined to digest the button image BG and the sword image KG. It may be.

[Modification 6]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, a button image is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. BG and sword image KG were in stock. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG or the sword image KG may be stocked on any of the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Good. In this case, on the upper side and the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in the strip-shaped area extending in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in the strip-shaped area extending in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked in a strip-shaped region extending in the vertical direction at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the band-shaped area in which the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and for example, the display position is changed by lottery every time the operation image stock effect is started. By being determined, the player himself discovers the relationship between the displayed position to be stocked and the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit)). Since it can contribute to finding out), it is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the operation image stock production.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (B) to 170 (G), a plurality of normal button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, among a plurality of normal button image BGs, a button image BG with one or more "long press" character images may be obtained and stocked by a button get effect, or one or more "continuous hits" may be obtained. You may get and stock the button image BG with the character image.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (B), two button image BGs are obtained and stocked in the button get effect, and one of the button image BGs is attached with the character image "long press". It was. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or more normal button image BGs may be obtained and stocked, or only the button image BG with the character image "long press" is attached. You may get one or more and stock them. Further, in the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (B), two normal button image BGs were obtained and stocked in the button get effect. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or more button image BGs with the character image "continuous hit" may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 9]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, they are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button image BG is digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, and the sword image KG is digested by the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64, so that the button image BG and the sword image KG are imaged one by one. It disappeared from the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, the remaining number of stocked button image BG and sword image KG, that is, the message "remaining X pieces (X is the number of stocks)" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. You may try to do it. At this time, the announcement "X remaining (X is the number of stocks)" may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. As the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are lit in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich)). The appearance expectation of, special sound and special image are set high respectively.

[Modification 10]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E) are produced. A button image BG imitating the button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 11]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine including a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player.
The first effect in which the image of the first operating means imitating the first operating means is stocked on the display screen, and
A second effect in which an image of the second operating means imitating the second operating means is stocked on the display screen, and
A third effect in which the image of the first operating means stocked by the first effect is digested by the operation of the first operating means.
A fourth effect in which the image of the second operating means stocked by the second effect is digested by the operation of the second operating means.
It is possible to execute the third effect or the fifth effect in which the winning result in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen in the middle of the fourth effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H2-1.
The first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1 or aspect H2-2.
The fifth effect is a hit confirmation effect that announces the hit confirmation, and displays the first hit confirmation image and the second hit confirmation image different from the first hit confirmation image on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3.
One of the first hit confirmation image and the second hit confirmation image is arranged rearward and the other is arranged forward and displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4.
Some of the first operation means images include an operation instruction image instructing a specific operation to the first operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5.
The fifth effect outputs a specific sound when the winning result in the specific lottery is a winning result.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification possible effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. In FIGS. 171 to 174, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative design displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also seen. Some are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This winning notification possible effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a winning notification possible effect, the corresponding image is displayed from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position of 14R and the light emitting mode are changed.

Here, first, the winning notification possible production A will be described, and then the winning notification possible production B, the winning notification possible production C, and the winning notification possible production D will be described in order.

[Direction A that can be announced]
First, the winning notification possible effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect A. The effect A that can be announced is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result-announceable effect A, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 171 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 171 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, four button image BGs are obtained, and the normal button as the second from the bottom is above the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom. An image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged, and a normal button image BG (that is, the effect button 63 is simply placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom as the third from the bottom). The imitated button image BG) is arranged, and the ordinary button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG which is the third from the bottom. In this state, the four button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

As described above, four button image BGs (normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (C) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking) ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171 (D), the background image is subsequently provided with seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

In FIG. 171 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 171 (B) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171 (E), subsequently, The premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is being performed while the hit confirmation effect is being performed. This premier image PMG1 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG1, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape. Has been done. The ally character CRA, which is largely displayed in the central portion of the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape, may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG1, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. ) Is satisfied, and then the player again produces the effect within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed operation).

After that, the premier image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (F), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) in FIG. 171 (B) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (F) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image flows from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171 (G), subsequently, The premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is being performed while the hit confirmation effect is being performed. This premier image PMG2 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG2, the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a and the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the premier image PMG1 of FIG. 171 (E) are different rainbows. The image is displayed, and the character image "Victory" is displayed one after another from the right side to the left side of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The character image "Victory" is displayed in a plurality of stages (here, two stages each) on the upper side and the lower side of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The outer shape of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape is the same as the outer shape of the premier image PMG1 shown in FIG. 171 (E).

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG2, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. ) Is satisfied, and then the player again produces the effect within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. The condition of operating (pressing) the button 63 is satisfied, and then the player again presses the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) displayed on the display screen 7a as the third condition. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) within the operation reception valid period.

The premier image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171 (E) and the premier image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171 (G) may be interchanged. In this case, as a condition for the premier image PMG2 to appear in FIG. 171 (E), the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player is within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) is satisfied, and then the player again presses the effect button while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) within the operation acceptance valid period of 63, and the condition for the premier image PMG1 to appear in FIG. 171 (G) is FIG. The pressing promotion effect shown in C) is started, and the condition that the player operates (pressing operation) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 is satisfied, and then, as the second condition, FIG. 171 (C) With the rainbow image BKH shown in D) displayed on the display screen 7a, the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 is satisfied, and then the condition is satisfied. As the third condition, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The condition needs to be met.

After that, the premier image PMG2 disappeared from the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (H), it was stocked on the right side in FIG. 171 (B) (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top). When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) emits a predetermined light as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed in mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (H) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound flows from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171 (I), the rainbow image BKH subsequently disappears from the display screen 7a, but is left as a hit confirmation effect. The movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction close to each other) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and the display screen 7a At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. One decorative member in which the right decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to, is united, and the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. (Combined accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode. At the same time, the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate to cover the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate by the letter "V". The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection. Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are emitted toward the front through the light guide plate, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In this way, in FIG. 171 (D), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed). After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. By performing the operation), the premier images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, can appear, which contributes to the improvement of the operation motivation of the effect button 63. be able to.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. As a result, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ing. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press) the effect button 63 at all and merely sees the progress of the effect. However, in the winning notification possible effect A, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the hit is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Direction B that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect B. The present announcementable effect B is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the result-announceable effect B, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 172 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and a normal button is placed above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom, and is the second from the bottom. Four button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, we have obtained two more button image BGs, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom and as the third from the bottom. The button image BG of is arranged, and the ordinary button image BG is arranged above the normal button image BG as the fourth from the bottom.

As described above, four button image BGs (normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (E) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to a hit (big hit or small hit) with a high expectation (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (F), the background image has seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

In FIG. 172 (F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 172 (D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and announcing the display of the premier image is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 172 (G), subsequently, A premier image PMG having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is being performed while the hit confirmation effect is being performed. This premier image PMG is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, as the background image of the premier image PMG, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape. Has been done. The ally character CRA, which is displayed large in the center of the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape, may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 172 (E) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. ) Is satisfied, and then the player again produces the effect within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 172 (F) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed operation).

After that, the premier image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) in FIG. 172 (D) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (H) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking) ) May be changed.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (H), subsequently shown in FIG. 172 (I). As shown in FIG. 172 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (I) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it changes to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking) or rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking). ) May be changed.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (H), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (I) described above.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (I), subsequently shown in FIG. 172 (J). As described above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each within their own variable display area, and the line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a (center line in the left-right direction) ) Is lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (I), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (J) described above.

In this way, in FIG. 172 (F), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed. After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, the player in FIGS. 172 (H) and 172 (I). When the effect button 63 is not operated (pressed) within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, the premier images other than the premier image PMG appearing in FIG. 172 (G) do not appear at all. In other words, in the winning notification possible production B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, the rare image (appears in the rare production) having an extremely low appearance rate. Since the player can give an opportunity to appear the premier image (image) by operating (pressing) the effect button 63, it contributes to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63. Can be done.

In addition, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIG. 172 (H) and FIG. 172 (I), tentatively. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, the premiere in the winning notification possible effect A shown in FIG. 171 (G), for example, without duplication. Premium images such as image PMG2 and other premium images (premier images in FIG. 171 (G) winning announcementable effect A and different premium images in FIG. 172 (G) winning announcementable effect B) The images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As described above, in the winning notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIGS. 172 (H) and 172 (I). If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, a rare image (an image appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication. ) Are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press) the effect button 63 at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, in the winning notification possible effect B, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the hit is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Direction C that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect C. The present announcementable effect C is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the winning notification possible effect C, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 173 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and a normal button is placed above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom, and is the second from the bottom. Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, we have obtained three more button image BGs, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, and as the third from the bottom. Button image BG is arranged, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above this normal button image BG, and a normal button as the fifth from the bottom is arranged above this normal button image BG. The image BG is placed.

As described above, five button image BGs (normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The five button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the five button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (E) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (F), the background image has seven colors. The hit confirmation effect is performed when the image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

In FIG. 173 (F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 173 (D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect) is accompanied by this. A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to green lighting).

In FIG. 173 (F), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (G). As described above, when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) in FIG. 173 (D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accompanied by the normal button image BG. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (G) is the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to red lighting (red blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (G) described above.

In FIG. 173 (G), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (H). As described above, when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom) in FIG. 173 (D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accompanied by the normal button image BG. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (H) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (G), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premier image different from the already displayed premier image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (H) described above.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (H), subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (I). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fifth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (I) is the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to rainbow lighting (rainbow blinking)). It may be.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (H), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIGS. 173 (F) and 173 (G) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the premier image already displayed is displayed. A premier image different from the above will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (I) described above.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (I), it is subsequently shown in FIG. 173 (J). As described above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each within their own variable display area, and a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a (center line in the left-right direction). ) Is lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (I), the premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed in. Here, in the case where the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIGS. 173 (F), 173 (G), and 173 (H), the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a. A premier image different from the already displayed premier image will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (J) described above.

In this way, in FIG. 173 (F), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit confirmation effect is performed. After that, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63, which is beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the image may be further notified, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, the player in FIGS. 173 (F) to 173 (I). When the effect button 63 is not operated (pressed) within the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63, a premier image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, appears at all. There is no. In other words, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, the rare image (appears in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. Since the player can give an opportunity to appear the premier image (image) by operating (pressing) the effect button 63, it contributes to the improvement of the motivation to operate the effect button 63. Can be done.

In addition, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIGS. 173 (G) to 172 (I), tentatively. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, it is possible to notify the winner as shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G) without duplication. Premium images such as the premier images PMG1 and PMG2 in the production A and other premium images (premier images PMG1 and PMG2 different from the premier images PMG1 and PMG2 in the production A that can be notified of the result of FIGS. 171 (E) and (G)) are displayed one after another. It is designed to be displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

As described above, in the winning notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIGS. 173 (G) to 172 (I). If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, a rare image (an image that appears in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate without duplication. ) Are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press) the effect button 63 at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, in the winning notification possible effect C, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the hit is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Direction D that can be announced]
Next, the winning notification possible effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification possible effect D. The present announcementable effect D is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the winning notification possible effect D, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 174 (A) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action production (battle production), a friendly character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword will appear. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button image BGs are obtained, and a normal button is placed above the normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) arranged at the bottom, and is the second from the bottom. Two button image BGs are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, we have obtained two more button image BGs, which are usually stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom and as the third from the bottom. The button image BG of is arranged, and the ordinary button image BG is arranged above the normal button image BG as the fourth from the bottom.

As described above, four button image BGs (normal button image BGs) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

The four button image BGs arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → based on the expectation degree (variation effect start command) that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit) In addition to the high expectation that it will be a hit (big hit or small hit) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) ) → Seven-color blinking (rainbow blinking (rich hit)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button image BGs stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, it is normal. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (E) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is the same as the embodiment (here, it lights up in white).

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (E), subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (F). As described above, when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 174 (D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accompanied by the normal button image BG. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (F) is lit in blue from the predetermined light emitting mode (white lighting) of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (E). It suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that it will change to and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Regarding the reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG has changed from white lighting to blue lighting, in FIG. 174 (E), the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63, but the effect button 63. When the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the hit. Because I couldn't do it. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (F), subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (G). As described above, when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged third from the bottom) in FIG. 174 (D) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accompanied by the normal button image BG. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (G) is from blue lighting to green lighting, which is the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (F). It suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that it will change to and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Regarding the reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG has changed from blue lighting to green lighting, in FIG. 174 (F), the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63, but the effect button 63. When the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the hit. Because I couldn't do it. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning.

When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (G), subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (H). As shown in FIG. 174 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged fourth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and also overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "press" is displayed, which prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (H) is from green lighting to red lighting, which is the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (G). It suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that it will change to and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Regarding the reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG has changed from green lighting to red lighting, in FIG. 174 (G), the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63, but instead of operating the effect button 63. When the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the hit. Because I couldn't do it. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces the confirmation of winning.

In FIG. 174 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses without the player operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, subsequently shown in FIG. 174 (I). As described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction close to each other), respectively. At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right movable accessory. The right decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the 14R, is united, and the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular accessory, the region formed in the annular is a circular region ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode. At the same time, the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), and the letter "V" is formed on the light guide plate to cover the outer circumference excluding the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed on the light guide plate by the letter "V". The letter "V" appears due to diffuse reflection. Further, on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are emitted toward the front through the light guide plate, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the direction in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the movable accessory 14R on the right side is an image from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

As described above, in the winning notification possible effect D, when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), the center of the display screen 7a. The operation (pressing operation) on the effect button 63 is performed by suggesting to the player that the large button image BG displayed on the unit is expected to be a hit (big hit or small hit) by changing the predetermined light emitting mode. By encouraging, the player can have an opportunity to make a rainbow image, which is a background image for confirming a hit (big hit or small hit), appear, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of the hit is played from the speaker 67, and the background image. An image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a hit confirmation effect is performed. In this hit confirmation effect, the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning. Further, for example, in FIG. 174 (E), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as the background image. A hit confirmation effect displayed on the display screen 7a is performed, and in FIG. 174 (F), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the sound is different from the specific sound and is premiered. A special sound announcing the display of the image is played from the speaker 67, and the premier image having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image and displayed on the display screen 7a according to the premier image. Rainbow production is performed. In other words, the rainbow effect is being performed while the hit confirmation effect is being performed. This premier image is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. It is one. Here, as the background image of the premier image, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character is displayed large in the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape. There is. The ally character that is displayed large in the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape may be a still image or a moving image. Further, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 after the hit confirmation effect is performed, the effect buttons 63 are shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G) without duplication. In addition to the premier images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare production) whose appearance rate in the effect A is extremely low, other premium images (FIGS. 171 (E) and (G) can be notified of the result). Premium images (other premier images different from the premier images PMG1 and PMG2) in the effect A) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As described above, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67. After a hit confirmation effect is performed in which an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, the player temporarily operates the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing (pressing operation). ) Then, since the premier image, which is a rare image (an image appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate, can appear, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operation motivation of the effect button 63.

Further, in the winning notification possible effect D, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of winning is emitted accordingly. After a hit confirmation effect is performed in which an image flowing from the speaker 67 and having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player temporarily presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. When the operation (pressing operation) is performed with, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without duplication, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become so. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate (press) the effect button 63 at all and merely sees the progress of the effect. However, in the winning notification possible effect D, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the hit is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is confirmed that (big hit or small hit) will occur.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blurring effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect that can be announced.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the winning notification possible effect A, and is specified. In the winning confirmation effect of notifying the winning result (win (big hit or small hit)) by the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means), the winning result by the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) in 171 (C) ( A first effect of displaying the rainbow image BKH (specific image) of FIG. 171 (D) for notifying a hit (big hit or small hit) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an effect following the first effect. When the number of operations of the button 63 (operating means) does not reach the upper limit of the number of operations and remains, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (D) and 171 (F), the operation of the effect button 63 (operating means) is urged. The second effect and can be performed. According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and after notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the effect button 63 (operation) When the number of operations of the means) does not reach the upper limit of the number of operations and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 (operation means), so that something beneficial to the player is further notified. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be done, and it is possible to improve the interest.
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the winning notification possible production A, in FIG. 171 (B) before the first production is executed. A third effect of stocking the button image BG (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means image) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is executed, and the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 171 (B). The upper limit of the number of operations is the number of stocks of the button image BG (operation means image) because the four button image BGs (the normal button image BGs are stocked in a state of being arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a of the device 7). According to this configuration, the number of stocks is 4, which is the number of times that the effect button 63 (operation means) can be operated. Therefore, the winning result (win (big hit or small hit)) is within this number of times. ) Can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to suggest to the player that the rainbow image BKH (specific image) for notifying) may be displayed.
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (D) to 171 (G) of the winning notification possible effect A, the effect button 63 (operating means) when the second effect is executed. ) Is operated, a fourth effect of displaying the premier image PMG1 (special image) of FIG. 171 (E) and the premier image PMG2 (special image) of FIG. 171 (G) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Can be executed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the effect button When the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated when the number of operations of 63 (operation means) does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the premier image PMG1 (special image) or the premier image PMG2 (special image) The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. As a result, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (operating means) when he / she sees the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, conventionally, in a state where it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the player does not need to operate the effect button 63 (operation means) at all and merely watches the progress of the effect. However, the winning notification possible effect A includes an effect that the player wants to further operate the effect button 63 (operation means) even when it is confirmed that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the winning notification possible effect A, the special images are the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 are one of the rare images (images that appear in the rare production) having an extremely low appearance rate, and the player positively directs the effect button to see the premier image. Since the 63 (operating means) is operated, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation to operate the effect button 63 (operating means).
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and 171 (G) of the winning notification possible production A, the third production is a rare image (in the rare production) having an extremely low appearance rate. It outputs a special sound that announces the display of the premier image, which corresponds to the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2, which are one of the appearing images). When the special sound does not flow, the player can automatically (sequence) even if the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 are suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by the progress of the production. ) Although it may be recognized as a normally appearing image that is only displayed, the special sound is recognized as a rare image (an image that appears in a rare production) due to the flow of a special sound, and it is inadvertently recognized as a rare image. It is possible to suppress overlooking.
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (D) of the winning notification possible production A, the first production is a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit, which corresponds to a specific image called a rainbow image BKH. Is output. When the specific sound does not flow, the player can automatically (sequence) display the rainbow image BKH even if the specific image BKH is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the effect progresses. Although there is a possibility that it will be recognized as an image that normally appears, it is possible to recognize the specific image as an image that announces the confirmation of a hit by playing a specific sound, and prevent accidental oversight without noticing it. ..
The same applies to the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect that can be announced.
[Modification 1]
In the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is an image display device. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 on the display screen 7a of 7, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image in the image display device 7. A special sound for announcing the display of the premier image as a specific image flows from the speaker 67, and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. However, instead of the button image BG that imitates the effect button 63, a sword image that imitates the sword member 64 may be used as appropriate. In this case, the degree of expectation that will be the winning result by the specific lottery set in the sword image (that is, the degree of expectation for the hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image) is set in the button image BG. It is preferable that it is higher than the one that is used. Since the button image BG is set to have a low expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit), the player can expect a hit (big hit or small hit) by displaying the button image BG on the display screen 7a. Even if you are disappointed, the sword image is set to have a higher expectation for hits (big hits and small hits) than the button image BG, so the player can see that the sword image is displayed on the display screen 7a. You can expect a hit (big hit or small hit).

[Modification 2]
In the winning notification possible effect A of 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 on the display screen 7a of the above, a specific sound for notifying the confirmation of hit is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image for notifying the confirmation of hit. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a specific sound for notifying the winning confirmation is made to flow from the speaker 67 by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a specific image. You may try to do it. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 3]
In the winning notification possible effect A of 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound for notifying the display of the premier image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premier image is displayed as the special image. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a special sound for notifying the display of the premier image as a special image is made to flow from the speaker 67 by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the premier image is displayed as the special image in the image display device 7. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification example 4]
The premier image PMG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171 (E), and the premier image PMG2 is displayed as a special image in the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171 (G). It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, a different premier image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 each time. However, the same premier image may be displayed in the winning notification possible production A to the winning notification possible production D. For example, the premier image of either the premier image PMG1 or the premier image PMG2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a as a common premier image. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to reducing the image (image data) stored in the ROM 103, and it is also possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the ROM 13 by reducing the capacity of the ROM 103.

[Modification 5]
The winning notification possible effect A in FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D in FIG. 174 are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button image BG was digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, so that the button image BG disappeared from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one by one. However, the remaining number of stocked button image BGs, that is, the message "remaining X pieces (X is the number of stocks)" as the number of stocks is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. May be good. At this time, the announcement "X remaining (X is the number of stocks)" may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. As the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are lit in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich)). The appearance expectation of, special sound and special image are set high respectively.

[Modification 6]
In the winning notification possible effect A of FIG. 171, the winning notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the winning notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible effect D of FIG. 174, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is an image display device. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
The winning notification possible production A in FIG. 171, the winning notification possible production B in FIG. 172, the winning notification possible production C in FIG. 173, and the winning notification possible production D in FIG. 174 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player.
In the production of notifying the winning result of a specific lottery by the operation of the operating means.
The first effect of displaying a specific image notifying the winning result on the display screen, and
Following the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect that prompts the operation of the operation means when the number of operations of the operation means does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-1.
Before the first effect is executed, the third effect of stocking the operation means image imitating the operation means on the display screen is executed.
The upper limit number of operations is the number of stocks of the operation means image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1 or aspect H3-2.
If the operating means is operated while the second effect is being executed, the fourth effect of displaying a special image on the display screen can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-3.
The special image is a premium image,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect H3-3 or the aspect H3-4.
The third effect outputs a special sound corresponding to the special image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect H3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5.
The first effect outputs a specific sound corresponding to the specific image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The specific target display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. This specific target display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific target display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the second movable accessory 15 or the like is driven.

[Specific target display effect A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect A. In the specific target display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH emits blue light. The emission color of the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "OARO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is obliquely downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a tilted state at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the characters "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH and the character image of "OARO" of the display unit image HG in the second movable accessory 15 are arranged in parallel in a state of being tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (G), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is obliquely upward to the right on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to jump behind (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 in a tilted state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. , The second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (J), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position of the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect B]
FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect B. In the specific target display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH emits blue light. The emission color of the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), of the characters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, the latter two characters "RO" that were emitting light disappeared, and the front two characters "RO" disappeared. Only the two characters "OA" emit light. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters of “OA” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "OA" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is obliquely downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a tilted state at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the light emitting "OA" character of the specific target display unit TH and the character image of "OA" of the display unit image HG of the second movable accessory 15 are arranged in parallel in a tilted state at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), the display of the character image of "OA" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), among the characters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, the previous two characters "OA" that had been emitting light disappeared and disappeared. The two letters "RO" behind it emit light. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character “RO” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "RO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is obliquely downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (I), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a tilted state at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the light emitting "RO" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the "RO" character image of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a tilted state at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (J), the display of the character image of "RO" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect C. In the specific target display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 177 (A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH emits blue light. The emission color of the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, at the same time, the “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 Of the letters, the previous two letters "OA" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters of “OA” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "OA" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is obliquely downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a tilted state at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the light emitting "OA" character of the specific target display unit TH and the character image of "OA" of the display unit image HG of the second movable accessory 15 are arranged in parallel in a tilted state at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (F), the display of the character image of "OA" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display unit TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (H), at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, at the same time, the “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 Of the letters, the last two letters "RO" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character “RO” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "RO" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time that the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is obliquely downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It is displayed as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (I), in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a tilted state at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state in the same manner as the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the light emitting "RO" character of the specific target display unit TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the "RO" character image of the display unit image HG are arranged in parallel in a tilted state at the same angle. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (J), the display of the character image of "RO" in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position, and returns to the retracted position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the state of being tilted at a predetermined angle to the horizontal state.

[Specific target display effect D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect D. In the specific target display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display unit TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display unit TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display unit TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH emits blue light, but each character does not emit light at this stage. The emission color of the specific target display unit TH may be any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), the fluctuating left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R disappear on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, of the characters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the second character "A" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), among the characters "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, the light emission of the character "A" that was emitting light disappears. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character “A” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "A" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (character image imitating the character "A") is behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character "A" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15. It is displayed so that it pops out downward from (back side). The display unit image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the letter “A” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in the same size as the size of the letter “A” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the letter “A” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, among the characters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the third character "R" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), among the characters "OARO" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, the light emission of the character "R" that was emitting light disappears. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the character “R” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "R" is blue, but it may be any color. Further, it may be the same color as the specific target display unit TH that emits light, or it may be a different color.

In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (character image imitating the character "R") is behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character "R" of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15. It is displayed so that it pops out downward from (back side).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in a size similar to the size of the character “R” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character “R” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific target display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, a first effect in which the specific target display unit TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH. Based on the above, a second effect in which a display unit image HG imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7 is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) including the specific target display unit TH and configured to be movable performs a predetermined operation. In the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on a predetermined operation of the second movable accessory 15. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first effect, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged. The operation of tilting at a predetermined angle is performed, and in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a based on the operation of the second movable accessory 15. Will be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect, the display unit image HG is secondly movable in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle. The third effect, which is displayed in an inclined state like the accessory 15, is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moved from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. At the same time, a fourth effect is executed in which the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the first effect, the specific target display unit TH emits light, and in the second effect, based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. , The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed from the specific target display unit TH on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if moving to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific target display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the display unit image HG is displayed based on a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 (here, an effect in which the specific target display unit TH operates or emits light). Although it is displayed on the screen 7a, the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH is not limited to the operation and light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the specific target display unit TH may be deformed, moved in a predetermined direction, or the light emission may be extinguished.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display unit TH is provided on the movable member (second movable accessory 15), but for example, it may be provided on the fixed member or displayed on the display screen 7a. It may be the one that has been done. That is, any mode may be used as long as it displays a specific target.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 blinks. The display unit image HG may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on the above. Further, the display unit image HG may also be displayed so as to repeat display and non-display so as to blink.
[Modification example 4]
In FIG. 178, the blue display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but for example, the display unit image displayed on the display screen 7a. The degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested depending on the aspect of HG. For example, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the color, size, number of times of display, number of blinks, etc. of the display unit image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I1-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a specific target display unit representing a specific target.
The first effect in which the specific target display unit performs a predetermined effect, and
Based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a display unit image imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-1.
Including the specific object display unit, a movable member configured to be movable is further provided.
In the first effect, the movable member performs a predetermined operation.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined operation of the movable member.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-2.
The movable member is arranged adjacent to the display means.
In the first effect, the movable member tilts at a predetermined angle.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moved from the movable member to the display means based on the operation of the movable member.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-3.
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the display unit image is displayed in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image is displayed in a state of being tilted in the same manner as the movable member.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-3 or aspect I1-4.
After the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moved from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member tilted at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. The fourth effect can be further executed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-1.
In the first effect, the specific target display unit emits light.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-6.
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means as if the display unit image moves from the specific target display unit to the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit. Be done,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the plurality of accessory combination effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. This combination effect of a plurality of characters can be executed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the plurality of accessory combination effects, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation timing change effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. Drive 15 mag.

[Multiple roles combined production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect A. In the plurality of accessory combination effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 179 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) Is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the whole is in a visible state. Further, although not shown in FIG. 179 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (the right portion of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) at the retracted position.

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). In the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 (first portion) is visible, and the upper portion 152 (second portion) described later is the upper portion of the front frame 53 (the gaming area 3 in the front frame 53). It is in a state where it is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visibly arranged (a part thereof is difficult to see) at the retracted position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (becomes hidden). The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right portion of the front frame 53 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are united on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contact but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right portion of the front frame 53 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is completely hidden behind the right portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible in the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect B. In the plurality of accessory combination effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) Is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the whole is in a visible state. Further, although not shown in FIG. 180A, the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (the right portion of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) at the retracted position.

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). At the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to be visible as a whole without being hidden by the upper portion of the front frame 53 (the upper portion of the game area 3 in the front frame 53).

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear (become non-display) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right portion of the front frame 53 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contact but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right portion of the front frame 53 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (H), the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is completely hidden behind the right portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is stationary in a state where the entire second movable accessory 15 can be visually recognized without being hidden by the upper portion of the front frame 53 at the retracted position.

[Multiple roles combined production C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect C. In the plurality of accessory combination effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 181 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) Is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the whole is in a visible state. Further, although not shown in FIG. 181 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (the right portion of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) at the retracted position.

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). In the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 (first portion) is difficult to see, and the upper portion 152 (second portion) described later is the upper portion of the front frame 53 (the game area 3 in the front frame 53). It is in a state where it is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visibly arranged (a part thereof is difficult to see) at the retracted position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear (become non-display). The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state. Then, a suggestion image SG suggesting that the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are united is displayed. Specifically, a suggestion image SG, which is a lightning-like image connecting the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right portion of the front frame 53 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are united on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contact but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (F), in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right portion of the front frame 53 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (H), the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is completely hidden behind the right portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible in the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of accessory combination effect D. In the plurality of accessory combination effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) Is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the whole is in a visible state. Further, although not shown in FIG. 182 (A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located in the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is in a state where it is difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R because the entire right side movable accessory 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (the right portion of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) at the retracted position.

Further, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). In the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 (first portion) is difficult to see, and the upper portion 152 (second portion) described later is the upper portion of the front frame 53 (the game area 3 in the front frame 53). It is in a state where it is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visibly arranged (a part thereof is difficult to see) at the retracted position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved by combining these stop symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (hit symbol "777"). ) Is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly in the horizontal direction but also those lined up almost horizontally. That is, all the items that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear (become hidden). The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effect may be performed in the displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advance position (deployment position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the left from a position (retracted position) behind the right portion of the front frame 53 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are united on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the right movable accessory 14R is arranged at a predetermined distance from the left fixed accessory 14L. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advance position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the coalescence here includes direct coalescence, indirect coalescence, non-contact but close position arrangement, and combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pair of movable members 14LP hidden behind the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L. Projects to the right toward the right movable accessory 14R and moves. Note that the movable member 14LP, which is hidden behind the upper end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L, is not shown here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), a pair of movable members 14LP project from the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the pair of movable members 14LP To form an annular decorative member. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, the movable member 14LP, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move to the left so as to return to the positions behind the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to the positions behind the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (J), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the position behind the right portion of the front frame 53 (evacuation position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is completely hidden behind the right portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the second movable accessory 15, the lower portion 151 is visible in the retracted position, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined production of multiple characters.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixing member) is arranged so that the whole can be seen, and the second movable part is arranged so as to be visible. It includes an accessory 15 (first movable member) and a right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) that is arranged so that it is difficult to see the whole. Then, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 moved to a predetermined position (advanced position) in front of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The right-side movable accessory 14R that has moved to a predetermined position (advancement) in front of the image is united, and a united effect representing a specific target can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181 and 182, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to be difficult to see with the lower portion 151 (first part) which is visibly arranged. Includes the top 152 (second part) and. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181 and 182, in the combined effect, the second movable accessory 15 is at a predetermined position (advanced position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), The lower 151 and the upper 152 of the second movable accessory 15 are visibly arranged. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, it is suggested that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined before the combined effect. It is possible to further execute the combined suggestion effect (in the present embodiment, the effect in which the suggestion SG is displayed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 182, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment further includes a movable member 14LP (third movable member) arranged so as to be difficult to see by the left fixed accessory 14L, and in the combined effect, the image display device 7 The movable member 14LP moved to a visible position in front of the display screen 7a of the above is combined with the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R to represent a part of a specific target. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, in the combined effect, a face image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to the configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the combined production of multiple characters.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are united to represent a human face as a specific object, but the specific object is a character or a character. It is not limited to living things and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined with the left fixed accessory 14L at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It may be combined at any position other than the advance position.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 181, the suggestion image SG is displayed as a coalescence suggestion effect suggesting that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are united, but as a coalescence suggestion effect. Is not limited to the display of images, and may be, for example, an effect in which accessories move or emit light.
[Modification example 4]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L was fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, but it may be fixed at any place. For example, it may be fixed to the front frame 53 or the like. Further, it may be provided as a part of the front frame 53 or the like.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I2-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
Fixing members arranged so that the whole can be seen,
With the first movable member, at least part of which is visibly arranged,
A gaming machine including a second movable member that is arranged so that it is difficult to see the whole.
At least, the fixing member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are united. , It is possible to perform a coalescing effect that represents a specific object,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-1.
The first movable member includes a first portion arranged so as to be visible and a second portion arranged so as to be difficult to see.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-2.
In the union effect, the first movable member is moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, so that the first portion and the second portion of the first movable member are visibly arranged. Be done,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3.
Prior to the coalescence effect, it is possible to further perform a coalescence suggestion effect suggesting that the fixing member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are united.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4.
Further provided with a third movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see by the fixing member.
In the union effect, the third movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means is united with the fixing member, the first movable member, and the second movable member, and the specific object. Represents a part of
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5.
In the union effect, an image representing a part of the specific object is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning notification tilting effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 186. In FIGS. 183 to 186, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the drawing of the decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is also seen. Some are omitted for ease of use, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing in the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This winning notification tilting effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) and includes an instruction to execute the winning notification tilt effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 and the like. The position and light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the winning announcement tilting effect A will be described, and then the winning announcement tilting effect B, the winning announcement tilting effect C, and the winning announcement tilting effect D will be described in order.

[Aori production A]
First, the winning notification tilting effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect A. This announcement Aori production A is performed during the variable production of the decorative pattern.

In the announcement Aori effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed with a white spherical hold icon 9A, respectively. That is, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 183 (A).

A selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the announcement Aori effect A was performed was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this B mode (here, a model of "cloud") is not shown, but an image. It is in a state of being greatly displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

During the period during which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), but the winning notification tilting effect A is performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect A is performed, the effect mode selected before the winning announcement tilting effect A is performed is continued in the winning notification tilting effect A as well.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, the winning announcement tilt effect A has three effect modes (a plurality of effects), excluding A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. It is a production that is commonly performed in mode). On the other hand, in the winning announcement tilting effect B, which will be described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), which is only the A mode.

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 183 (A) starts to fluctuate and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) The hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Regarding whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, the jackpot pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command (in the case of a jackpot) It is determined based on the jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

The hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the game machine 1, and then the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG are on the upper side of the hit suggestion image ASG. With the straight line passing through the midpoint of each of the lower side and the lower side as the central axis, the mode repeatedly swings and fluctuates in the front-rear direction (hereinafter, may be referred to as “swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while emitting a flash of light and pops out. A winning production will be performed. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player expects that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. It is designed to be able to move.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit confirmation effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols 8R may be aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes three and changes to the blue number "3", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 The number of zeros continues to be the red number "0".

Even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG. Is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit confirmation effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols 8R may be aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 The number of zeros continues to be the red number "0".

Even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG. Is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the midpoints of the left side and the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "5". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit confirmation effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols 8R may be aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (G), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the second hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes one. The number of zeros continues to be the red number "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 183 (H). During the fluctuation, the hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front and pops out while emitting a flash of light. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. The number HMG (here) is the number HMG for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Then, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue number "1", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Is zero and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 183 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 183 (I), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is one blue number "1", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The number of special figure reservations is zero and the red number “0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 183 (H). Further, in FIG. 183, the state in which the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are all erased is shown in FIG. 183. FIG. 183 (H) shows a state in which the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared while being continuously maintained in (H). Is still maintained. Further, in FIG. 183 (I), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is continuously maintained in FIG. 183 (H).

In this way, the hit suggestion image ASG suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, when the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect is notified to the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. Can suddenly occur, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

In addition, the winning notification tilting effect A has three effect modes (plural effects), which are B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is commonly performed in the mode), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is the common display mode in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes). On the other hand, since the winning announcement tilting effect B, which will be described later, is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, it is in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production B]
Next, the winning notification tilting effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification tilting effect B. This announcement Aori production B is performed during the variable production of the decorative pattern.

In the result B, first, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed with a white spherical hold icon 9A, respectively. That is, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed as a numerical value HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is zero, and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A).

A selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the announcement Aori effect A was performed was the A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode (here, a model of the "sun") is not shown, but an image. It is in a state of being displayed large on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

During the period during which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), but the winning notification tilting effect B is performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect B is performed, the effect mode selected before the winning announcement tilting effect B is performed is continued in the winning notification tilting effect B as well.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that the winning announcement tilting effect B is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. .. On the other hand, the above-mentioned winning announcement tilting effect A is an effect that is commonly performed in three effect modes (plurality of effect modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

If the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A) starts to fluctuate and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) The hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Regarding whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, the jackpot pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command (in the case of a jackpot) It is determined based on the jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

The hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed large in the central portion of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the game machine 1, and then the hit suggestion image ASG expands to the original size during the fluctuation. It is an embodiment in which the returning motion is repeatedly performed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while emitting a flash of light and pops out. A definite production will be performed. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). You can flutter.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. It is displayed as a stop lined up in a line connecting the Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". .. Since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Is started, and after that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be aligned and hit (big hit or small hit) with the same symbol. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes three and changes to the blue number "3", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 The number of zeros continues to be the red number "0".

Even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the display of the hit suggestion image ASG continues. Will be done.

During the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 184 (D), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started. As a result, during the fluctuation, the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". .. By the time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed and the size of the hit suggestion image ASG is returned to the original size. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed. The player is expected to develop a production in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (big hit or small hit). Can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (F), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 The number of zeros continues to be the red number "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in FIG. 184 (F) moves to the hold display position 9Cd to become the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. 184 (F) ) To FIG. 184 (H), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, during the fluctuation, the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (I), a hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the fluctuation, and the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash of light and pops out. The incoming display mode is repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. .. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. The number HMG (here) is the number HMG for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Then, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is the blue number "2", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Is zero and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 184 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is arranged in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side of. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 184 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numbers. HMG (Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the blue number "2", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The number of special figure reservations is zero and the red number “0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 184 (I). Further, in FIG. 184 (J), a state in which the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are all erased is shown in FIG. 184. While being continuously maintained in (I), it is displayed at the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd. The state in which the hold icon 9C has disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 184 (I). Further, in FIG. 184 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 184 (I).

In the A mode, even if the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184 (A) and hits the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A (big hit or small hit), even if there is one. The hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is also played from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, when the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) and reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image is displayed even though the effect prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all. An image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, in the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button", when the number of operations (press operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number in a state where the effect of prompting the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all, So-called "hidden commands" are generated and can be executed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

The "predetermined number of times" includes 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 17 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times, and the effect control microcomputer 91. It is set by lottery in (image control microcomputer 101). That is, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, the effect is lost. For example, when the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad (the winning information is lost). When the hold icon 9C is set to (), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, and the effect is lost. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (the winning information is a hit (big hit or small hit)) becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer It is set to 17 times by lottery in 91 (microcomputer 101 for image control), and when the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 17 times, the "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. It becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is a dedicated effect performed only when the A mode is selected, and the decorative design starts to change in FIG. 184 (A), and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit), the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of the hit (big hit or small hit) is completely displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition to the case where it is not performed, it may be performed when the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are digested as the hold icon 9C and the game ball enters the first start port 20 and the second start port 21. is there.

In other words, in the A mode, even when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184 (A) and there are four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A (big hits and small hits). When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. , "Hit confirmation effect by effect button" is performed, while the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A) starts to change and hits four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A (big hit or small hit). When there is an object and the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the game No matter how much the person operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is prevented and the winning notification tilting effect B proceeds.

Further, in the C mode, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a hit (big hit). Even if the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of (or small hit) is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, although not shown, the decorative design is changing. , The effect of urging the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 that the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed. This is different from A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

In this way, the hit suggestion image ASG suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation is displayed. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

Further, as described above, the winning notification tilting effect A shown in FIG. 183 is the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode, among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is performed in common in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes) is the common display mode. ing. On the other hand, since the winning notification tilting effect B is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, it is suggested to hit in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production C]
Next, the winning notification tilting effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect C.

In the winning announcement tilting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is produced by producing each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game) and ending all of them. At the end of the game production period and the beginning of the notification period, the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. Further, the image display device holds the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 as numerical values HMG. 7 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "4" separated from each other on the right side.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 after the display start in FIG. 185 (A).

When the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed hit" is displayed in FIG. 185 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20 Since the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is zero and the number is "0", and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is four, the second start port If there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 21, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 185 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (C), a solid suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The hit suggestion image ASG having a typical W-shape is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the game machine 1. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in.

In addition, in the case where there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 in the specific period. , The flash image FH shown in FIG. 185 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 185 (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in a specific period, there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. In some cases), the announcement C will not be performed and the decorative pattern will start to change.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 185 (D), it is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 185 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are large. It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG are in the front-back direction with the straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the hit suggestion image ASG as the central axis. It is in a mode of repeatedly swinging and swinging (hereinafter, may be referred to as “swinging motion of hit suggestion image ASG”). When the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the hit confirmation effect is performed in which the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves from the central portion of the display screen 7a toward the front and pops out while emitting a flash of light. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player expects that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur. It is designed to be able to move.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Bd is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Bd moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Bd is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. Each of the 9Bs is displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, as described above, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. 1 The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numerical values HMG, respectively. Here, the numbers HMG are the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. 1 The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 continues to be zero and the blue number becomes "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 Becomes three and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the hold icon 9B and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 185 (D), the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection unit SEL that can be used is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. Here, since the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative symbol before the winning announcement tilt effect C is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, the effect mode selected is the B mode, which will be described later. Although (here, a model of a "cloud") is not shown, it is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

During the period during which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), but the winning notification tilting effect C is performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning announcement tilting effect C is performed, the effect mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol before the winning announcement tilting effect C is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the winning announcement tilting effect C. It will be in a state of being continued.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

In addition, there are three production modes (plural productions) of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode, excluding the A mode, and the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode. It is a production that is commonly performed in mode). On the other hand, in the winning announcement tilting effect D, which will be described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), which is only the A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. It is displayed as a stop lined up in a line connecting the Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit confirmation effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols 8R may be aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. It becomes B and changes to the red number "2".

Even when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG. Is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are set to the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, the hit confirmation effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the decorative symbols 8R may be aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. It becomes an individual and changes to the red number "1".

Even when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG. Is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 185 (I). During the fluctuation, the hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG pops out from the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out while emitting a flash is repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. The number HMG (here) is the number HMG for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Then, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Is one and the red number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 185 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is arranged in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 185 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. One special figure hold and the red number “1”) are continuously displayed in FIG. 185 (I). Further, in FIG. 185 (J), the state in which the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd are all erased is shown in FIG. 185. The state in which the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a while being continuously maintained in (I) is shown in the figure. It continues to be maintained at 185 (I). Further, in FIG. 185 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is continuously maintained in FIG. 185 (I).

In this way, the hit suggestion image ASG suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the central part of the display screen 7a and then displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The swinging motion of the ASG is repeated. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, when the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect is notified to the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. Can suddenly occur, so that the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

In addition, the winning notification tilting effect C has three effect modes (plural effects), which are B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is commonly performed in the mode), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is the common display mode in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes). On the other hand, the winning announcement tilting effect D, which will be described later, is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, so that in one effect mode (single effect mode) The display mode of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Aori production D]
Next, the winning notification tilting effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the winning announcement tilting effect D.

In the winning announcement tilting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 186 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is produced by producing each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game) and ending all of them. At the end of the game production period and the beginning of the notification period, the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. Further, the image display device holds the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 as numerical values HMG. 7 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left side, and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The special figure hold is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "4" separated from each other on the right side.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the display start in FIG.

When the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20 Since the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is zero and the number is "0", and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is four, the second start port If there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 21, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 186 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (C), a solid suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The hit suggestion image ASG having a typical W-shape is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that the front side thereof faces the front of the game machine 1. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not there is any hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. It is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-judgment result), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in.

In the specific period, if there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the figure is shown in the figure. The flash image FH shown in 186 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 186 (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in a specific period, when there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the four second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. H), the announcement D will not be performed, and the decorative design will start to change.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 186 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 186 (D), it is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 186 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are large. It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, the hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed so that the front side thereof faces the front of the game machine 1 in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and then the hit suggestion image ASG expands during the fluctuation. Then, the operation of returning to the original size is repeatedly performed (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG"). When the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the hit confirmation effect is performed in which the hit suggestion image ASG repeatedly moves from the central portion of the display screen 7a toward the front and pops out while emitting a flash of light. This hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, the hit confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). You can flutter.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be variablely displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are correspondingly small in the sub-variable region. The decorative symbols of are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all the right decorative symbols 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small decorative symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. In addition, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C , The right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding small decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Bd is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Bd moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Bd is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. Each of the 9Bs is displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, as described above, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. 1 The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numerical values HMG, respectively. Here, the numbers HMG are the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, respectively. 1 The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 continues to be zero and the blue number becomes "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 Becomes three and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the hold icon 9B and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in FIG. 186 (D), the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection unit SEL that can be used is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached a specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected. Here, since the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative symbol before the winning announcement tilt effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, the effect mode selected is the A mode described later, so the theme image of this A mode. (Here, a model of the "sun") is not shown, but is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

During the period during which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to change. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), but the winning notification tilting effect D is performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning announcement tilting effect D is performed, the effect mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement tilting effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the winning announcement tilting effect D. It will be in a state of being continued.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the A mode. The D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the B mode, the production with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and the theme image imitating the "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to the B mode. The A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, the production with the theme of "rain" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the C mode. The B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, the production with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and the theme image imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward to form the D mode. The C mode arranged below the above is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel rotates from the top toward a specific area. It is displayed, and the A mode is again located in the specific area.

It should be noted that the winning announcement tilting effect D is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. .. On the other hand, the above-mentioned winning announcement tilting effect C is an effect that is commonly performed in three effect modes (plurality of effect modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3". .. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed. The player is expected to develop a production in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (big hit or small hit). Can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. It becomes B and changes to the red number "2".

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. .. As a result, since the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, respectively. The stops are displayed side by side in a line connecting the two (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "4". .. By the time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed and the size of the hit suggestion image ASG is returned to the original size. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the deviation is confirmed, since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and then the hit confirmation effect is performed. The player is expected to develop a production in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (big hit or small hit). Can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the number HMG indicates that the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number continues to be "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. It becomes an individual and changes to the red number "1".

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. .. As a result, since the winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 186 (I). During the fluctuation, the hit confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG pops out from the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out while emitting a flash is repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region where the small decorative symbol (not shown) is variablely displayed, which is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left of the display screen 7a. The number HMG (here) is the number HMG for the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Then, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Is one and the red number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 186 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in their own variable display area, respectively. The stop display is arranged in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint on the left side and the midpoint on the right side. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "7", so that the same symbol is displayed. It is stopped and displayed as a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 186 (J), the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. One special figure hold and the red number “1”) are continuously displayed in FIG. 186 (I). Further, in FIG. 186 (J), FIG. 186 shows a state in which the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared. The state in which the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a while being continuously maintained in (I) is shown in the figure. It continues to be maintained at 186 (I). Further, in FIG. 186 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained in FIG. 186 (I).

In the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed hit" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the sphere, the hit (big hit) The hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of (or small hit) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is also played from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, when the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation) and reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image is displayed even though the effect prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all. An image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, in the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button", when the number of operations (press operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number in a state where the effect of prompting the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 is not performed at all, So-called "hidden commands" are generated and can be executed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

The "predetermined number of times" includes 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 17 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times, and the effect control microcomputer 91. It is set by lottery in (image control microcomputer 101). That is, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, the effect is lost. For example, when the hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd (the winning information is lost). When the hold icon 9C is set to (), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, and the effect is lost. When the hold icon 9B (the winning information is a hit (big hit or small hit)) displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer It is set to 17 times by lottery in 91 (microcomputer 101 for image control), and when the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 reaches 17 times, the "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. It becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is a dedicated effect performed only when the A mode is selected, and is the end of the notification period in which the message MG "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A). At the beginning of the specific period, the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is hit (big hit). Even if there is a hit (or small hit), the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In addition, the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds is digested as the hold icon 9C, and the game is played to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21. It may be done when the ball enters.

In other words, in the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball to the second starting port 21 Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the 4 second special figure hold based on the ball entry, the hit (big hit or small hit) When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a big hit or a small hit is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, "effect" is displayed. While the "hit confirmation effect by the button" is performed, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the second start port When there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the 4 second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into 21. When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the player presses the effect button 63. Regardless of the operation (pressing operation), the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is blocked and the winning notification tilting effect D proceeds.

Further, in the C mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed hit" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the sphere, the hit (big hit or small hit) Even if the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shaped shape suggesting the existence of) is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, although not shown, the effect button is displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. An effect that encourages the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 that the effect button image imitating the 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed. This is different from A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed. This "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image for notifying the confirmation of winning.

In this way, the hit suggestion image ASG suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the central part of the display screen 7a and then displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The expansion motion of the ASG is repeated. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Can be improved.

Further, at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd, a white spherical hold icon with the lowest expectation of hit (big hit or small hit) is obtained. Even if each is displayed, when the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the fluctuation is displayed. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

Further, as described above, the winning notification tilting effect C shown in FIG. 185 is the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode, excluding the A mode, among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode. Since the effect is performed in common in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes), the display mode of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the three effect modes (plurality of effect modes) is the common display mode. ing. On the other hand, since the winning notification tilting effect D is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only A mode, it is suggested to hit in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the announcement of the result.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 183 (A) to 183 (I) of the winning notification tilting effect A, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided. In preparation, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning image) having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence (including hitting) of the winning information (preliminary determination command) of the hold icon 9A is displayed on the image display device 7. After the first effect displayed in the central portion (predetermined position of the display means) of the display screen 7a and the first effect, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed (the hit suggestion image ASG). It is possible to execute the second effect of starting the swinging motion). According to this configuration, a hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed. The display mode of is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player can expect that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , It is possible to improve the interest.
In the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, a hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the winning information of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed. The display mode of (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will be generated by starting the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In FIG. 185, the winning notification tilting effect C is provided with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and the winning information (preliminary determination command) of the hold icon 9B includes a hit (hit is included). After displaying the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting that) in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After the first effect of displaying a small image (at a predetermined position of the display means) in the rectangular area of the above and the first effect, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed (of the hit suggestion image ASG). It is possible to execute the second effect of starting the swinging motion). According to this configuration, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of 7a, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit) by starting the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It can be agitated and can improve the interest.
In the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning image) suggesting the existence of a hit in the winning information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device. It is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of No. 7, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit) by starting the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the effect button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect button 63 ( One of a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by operating (pressing operation) of the operation means), and a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, A mode, Of the B mode, C mode, and D mode), the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) (in the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184). Hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is variable by the second effect in the effect mode (B mode, C mode, D mode) other than the specific effect mode (A mode). ) Is different from the display mode (the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the winning notification tilting effect A in FIG. 183). According to this configuration, among a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode), the effect is changed by the second effect in the other effect mode (B mode, C mode, D mode). The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is a common display mode that is commonly used, whereas the hit suggestion image that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (winning image) is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode. As a result, among the plurality of types of effect modes, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) can be set to the dedicated display mode only in a specific effect mode, and thus it is provided to the player as a rare effect that appears rarely. be able to.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the hit suggestion image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (winning image) is to repeat the movement of expanding in a predetermined direction and then returning to the original state (expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG in the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184) as a specific operation. The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), which is changed by the second effect in the effect mode (B mode, C mode, D mode), reciprocates in a predetermined direction (in a predetermined direction) as an operation different from a specific operation. The motion of swinging in small steps) (the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the winning notification tilting effect A in FIG. 183) is repeated. According to this configuration, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a display mode in which the expansion motion (specific operation) of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeated. It is possible to repeatedly give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the expansion motion (specific movement) of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in other production modes is the hit suggestion image. Since the display mode is such that the rocking motion of the ASG (movement different from the specific motion) is repeated, the player is given an opportunity to visually recognize the rocking motion of the ASG (movement different from the specific motion). It can be given repeatedly. This makes it easier for the player to confirm the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) in each selection mode.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific effect mode (A mode) in the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 (operation means) reaches a predetermined number, the winning is confirmed. It is possible to execute the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) that displays the rainbow image (specific image) that announces the image on the image display device 7 (display means), and the hit suggestion image ASG (win image). After the first effect of displaying on the image display device 7 (display means), the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) is blocked, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG (second effect) is performed. Will be executed. According to this configuration, in a specific effect mode (A mode), the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 (operation means) while the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed on the image display device 7. Even if the operation) is performed, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed at all, so the expansion motion (second effect) of the hit suggestion image ASG is executed while making the player feel uneasy. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.
The same applies to the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, after the first effect of displaying the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button is displayed. The selection of one of the plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by the operation of 63 (operating means) is prevented. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change of the effect mode in the second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the winning image, which is performed after the first effect.
The same applies to the winning notification tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning notification tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning notification tilting effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183 and the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the second effect mode (A mode) in the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. The winning image that is variable by the effect of the above, or the winning image that is changed by the second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. It is possible to execute a fourth effect of moving from a predetermined position of (display means) to another position and changing to a hit notification display mode for notifying a hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183 (H) of the winning notification tilting effect A, a hit suggestion image that is variable by the second effect in another effect mode (B mode (the same applies to C mode and D mode)). As a hit notification display mode, the ASG (winning image) is a display that moves from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (other position) and pops out while emitting a flash of light. The embodiment is repeated. As shown in FIG. 184 (I) of the hit notification tilting effect B, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), which is variable by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode), is a flash of light as a hit notification display mode. The display mode of moving from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) suddenly occurs, so that the player may be shocked by the sudden display mode in which the hit (big hit or small hit) is announced. it can.
In the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, as shown in FIGS. 185 (H) and 185 (I) of the winning notification tilting effect C, another effect mode (B mode (C)). The hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), which is variable by the second effect in (mode and D mode as well)), is a rectangular area (first) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a hit notification display mode. (Predetermined position), the image is moved to the center of the display screen 7a, and while emitting a flash of light, the image is displayed from the center of the display screen 7a (second predetermined position) toward the front (other position). The display mode of moving and popping out is repeated. As shown in FIGS. 186 (H) and 186 (I) of the winning notification tilting effect D, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a hit. As a notification display mode, the display screen of the image display device 7 jumps out of the rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a, and emits a flash of light. The display mode of moving from the central portion (second predetermined position) of 7a toward the front side (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) suddenly occurs, so that the player may be shocked by the sudden display mode in which the hit (big hit or small hit) is announced. it can.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning announcement tilting effect.
[Modification 1]
In the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning image) ) Was repeatedly changed. At this time, a time may be provided in which the display mode is repeatedly changed while the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) emits a flash of light. Keeping the player aware of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) may tire the player. On the other hand, when the timing (timing) of directing the line of sight to the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) arrives, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) repeatedly changes the display mode while emitting a flash to that effect. Can be suggested to the player, so that it is not necessary to always make the player aware of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), and fatigue to the player can be suppressed.

[Modification 2]
In the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, the hit suggestion image ASG (variable by the second effect) As a hit notification display mode, the winning image) repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front and pops out while emitting a flash of light. However, even when the hit (big hit or small hit) is not notified, one or a plurality of display modes that move toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light. If it is performed only once (for example, 3 to 5 times), the display mode may be returned to the original display mode. For example, in the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 183 (H) to FIG. 183 (B), and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. In FIG. 184, in the winning notification tilting effect B, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 184 (I) to FIG. 184 (B), and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. In the winning notification tilting effect C of 185, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 185 (I) to FIG. 185 (D), the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted, and FIG. In the winning notification tilting effect D, the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 186 (I) to FIG. 186 (D), and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. In this way, the player can be reminded of a hit (big hit or small hit) for a moment.

[Modification 3]
In the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186, when the variable display of the decorative symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started, the display screen of the image display device 7 is started. On the upper right side of 7a, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode was arranged and displayed. However, at the end of the notification period in which the message MG of "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIGS. 185 (A) and 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period, the game ball to the second starting port 21 If there is a hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the ball entry (big hit or small hit), the selection unit SEL is set. It may not be possible to select the effect mode as hidden. This is because when the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185 and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. 186 are performed, the effect mode cannot be selected at all in the first place, so that there is no problem even if the selection unit SEL is hidden. In this case, only the currently selected effect mode may be displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the winning notification tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning notification tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning notification tilting effect C of FIG. 185, and the winning notification tilting effect D of FIG. It was possible to select one of the production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode). However, instead of the effect button 63, the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation) can produce the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
The winning announcement tilting effect A in FIG. 183, the winning announcement tilting effect B in FIG. 184, the winning announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185, and the winning announcement tilting effect D in FIG. 186 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The first effect of displaying a winning image suggesting the existence of a hit in the winning information of the hold icon, and
After the first effect, a second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the winning image can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-1.
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player
One of a plurality of types of effect modes can be selected by operating the operation means.
Among the plurality of types of effect modes, the display mode of the winning image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode and the second effect in other effect modes other than the specific effect mode are variable. Is different from the display mode of the winning image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2.
The display mode of the winning image, which is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode, repeats a specific operation.
The display mode of the winning image, which is changed by the second effect in the other effect mode, repeats an operation different from the specific operation.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
A game machine according to aspect J1-2 or aspect J1-3.
In the specific effect mode, when the number of operations of the operation means reaches a predetermined number of times, a third effect of displaying a specific image for notifying the confirmation of winning can be executed.
After the first effect, the third effect is blocked and the second effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-4.
After the first effect, selection of one of the plurality of types of effect modes by the operation of the operating means is prevented.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect J1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5.
The winning image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode or the winning image changed by the second effect in the other effect mode is moved from a predetermined position to another position to win a hit. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to the notification display mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

The character selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. This character selection effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character selection effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character selection effect A]
FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, it is shown that three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. Enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character in its display color. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is white. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching). For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical strength information image IH. The longer this bar is, the stronger the enemy character's physical strength is, and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. However, as time passes, the order becomes the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is fought. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect B]
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, it is shown that three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRD is "D". In addition, although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical strength information image IH. The longer this bar is, the stronger the enemy character's physical strength is, and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. However, as time passes, the order becomes the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is fought. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (G), the winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is doublet and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect C]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, it is shown that three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRD is "D". In addition, although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed on the physical strength information image IH, indicating that the larger the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. However, as time passes, the order becomes the information image IB, the information image ID, and the information image IB. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In the order change, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be enlarged and displayed more than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is fought. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbol in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Character selection effect D]
FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 190 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to change. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold images 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the hold image 9C corresponding to the fluctuation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (D), the enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in the battle effect described later. Here, it is shown that three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (E), the enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect of selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. The information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and the information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

The information image IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character by its character. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRD is "D". In addition, although an example of one letter of the alphabet is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed on the physical strength information image IH, indicating that the larger the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed. In the figure, the information image IC is displayed, but the information image IB is displayed with the passage of time, and the information image ID is displayed with the passage of time, and this is repeated. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent of the battle production. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the information image IC is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and in the case of a hit, the friendly character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRC is fought. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (G), the defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbol in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRC that are the opponents of the battle effect are displayed by the enemy character appearance effect (FIGS. 187 (D), 188 (D), and 189 (D)). , FIG. 190 (D)). Then, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are displayed by the enemy character selection effect, and the information images IB, IC, and ID are selected to become the opponent character. Is selected (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188 (E), FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the enemy character becomes highly interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are the type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. It is composed of (FIG. 187 (F), FIG. 188 (F), FIG. 189 (F), FIG. 190 (F)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle effect ( 187 (E), 188 (E), 189 (E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent of the battle effect (FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the physical strength information image IH showing the physical strength of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187 (E) and 188 (E)). , FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the type information image IK capable of identifying the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187 (E) and 188 (E)). , FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the information image IB, IC, and ID include two types of information, the type information image IK and the physical fitness information image IH. On the other hand, it may include three or more pieces of information.

[Modification 2]
In the above, an example of selecting an opponent's enemy character from the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the selection target can be selected by selecting the information to be selected. For example, an example may be used in which one is selected from a plurality of types of mini games.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the information image IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected, but for example, when the player presses the effect button 63, the information image IB, IC, and ID can be selected. Good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect J2-1]
It ’s a game machine,
It is an effect of selecting one of a plurality of selection targets, and the selection target is displayed, and the target information which is information about the selection target is displayed in an area different from the display area of the selection target. By selecting the target information, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which the selection target is selected.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-1.
The target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of pieces of information.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-2.
After the information images as the target information are sequentially displayed, the selection target is selected by selecting one information image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J2-1 to J2-3.
The selection target is an opponent's character,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4.
The information image includes a graph image suggesting the difficulty of capturing the character.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect J2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4 or aspect J2-5.
The information image includes an image that can identify the character.
A game machine characterized by that.

The start port light emitting effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. In FIGS. 191 to 194, some decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawing, and the periphery of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged in the above are also omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

This start port light emitting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) and includes an instruction to execute a start port light emission effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command, pre-determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the light emitting mode of the first start port 20. Further, the voice control board 106 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub control board 90, and executes a sound effect that outputs various sounds from the speaker 67.

The first starting port 20 is provided with a decorative substrate for the first starting port on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (not shown) are mounted therein, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The first start port 20 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port emits light. When the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. In the big hit production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. Become.

The inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light to illuminate the front surface of the first starting port 20. Some specifications are transparent. A type having this specification will be referred to as a special plating specification, and a normal type having no special plating specification will be described below as a normal specification. The first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is both molded of a colored or colorless transparent resin, and is shaped (not shown). Although the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is molded of a colored or colorless transparent resin, the surface thereof may be formed as a smooth surface (flat surface or curved surface).

On the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification, a decorative member (hereinafter, may be referred to as “decorative member modeling (smile modeling)”) formed by printing a smile on the surface is first started. When the full-color LED mounted in front of the decorative substrate for the mouth and mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light, the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. While the modeling (smile modeling) is visible, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is turned off, it is placed inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) is difficult to see, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20.

In the special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, and further, in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers. , The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. It is said that. In the jackpot production, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light, and the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is modeled (smiles) through the front surface of the first starting port 20. The modeling) may be made visible.

Here, first, as the light emitting effect of the first starting port 20 in the normal specification, the starting port light emitting effect A, the starting port light emitting effect B, and the starting port light emitting effect C will be described in order, and then the first starting port in the special plating specification. The start port light emitting effect D will be described as the light emitting effect of 20.

[Starting port light emission effect A]
First, the start port light emitting effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect A. The start port light emitting effect A is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Each of 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 191 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to be lit in white, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). ..

When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), a white spherical holding icon 9A appears at the fourth holding display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 191 (C). The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are displayed and are in stock without being digested, resulting in a full hold icon. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port has already been controlled to be lit in white and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white, a game ball is inserted in the first starting port 20. As shown in FIG. 191 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the ball. It is controlled to turn off and then turned on again in white. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port blinks white only once, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks white only once. At this time, in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned on). ).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 191 (C). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 191. As shown in (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the state of being lit in white. Become. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned. When the stop display is displayed and the disengagement is confirmed, the change is terminated and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuation, the full color LED is already on hold, and as shown in FIG. 191 (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to light white. By doing so, the state in which the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white is maintained, and since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, which is called "spot". The hold sound, which is a sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 191 (I), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative symbol starts to change, and the first start starts when the change starts. When the game ball does not enter the mouth 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is controlled to light white, so that the first start port 20 is lit. The light emitting mode of is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). ..

As described above, in the starting port light emitting effect A, in the state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. When the number of reserved balls increases due to the game ball entering the starting port 20, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and is white again. The lighting is controlled, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port blinks white only once, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks white only once. On the other hand, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white and the tank is full. In some cases, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the holding display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the holding ball does not increase. Therefore, the full color mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port. The LED is maintained and controlled to be lit in white without being controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is not in a state of blinking white only once but is maintained in a state of being lit in white. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from turning white to turning off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is controlled to light white again, and it is possible to change to a light emitting mode that blinks white only once, and when the holding ball does not increase, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in white lighting. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to visually appeal whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emission effect A, the effect appeals to the eyes that the light emission mode of the first start port 20 is blinked in white, and the hearing that the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67. By using the effect together with the effect, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that the increase in the number of reserved balls can be transmitted to the player.

[Starting port light emission effect B]
Next, the start port light emitting effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect B. The start port light emitting effect B is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started and stopped. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at a high speed. The background image placed behind the decorative symbol is displayed by changing the display mode from the opaque state to the translucent state and fluctuating at high speed while the stop-displayed decorative symbol gradually increases in speed. It can be visually recognized through a translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, it decelerates just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and a temporary stop display or a stop display is displayed (temporary stop display, then stop display). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "1", the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed. To. Along with this, the fluctuation ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 192 (A), the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. A yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the third hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad is displayed. , The hold icon is not displayed. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the change in FIG. 192 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, FIG. 192 As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .. When the change in FIG. 192 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the end of such change, The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) flashes white only once, and the number of reserved balls increases due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In order to notify that, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third The hold icon disappears at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative symbol starts to change, and at the start of the change, the game ball enters or does not enter the first start port 20. As shown in 192 (D), the color should be the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C in the shape of a yellow (gold) star, that is, in conjunction with the color attached to the hold icon 9C. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). It becomes a state. If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). ..

After the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), when one game ball continuously enters the first start port 20 (that is, two game balls continuously enter the first start port 20 one by one). A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 192 (E). The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a stocked state without being digested, and the hold is full. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port has already been controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit) and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold lit), As shown in FIG. 192 (F), it is mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port without any control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. By maintaining and controlling the full-color LED to be lit in yellow (gold lit), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the yellow lit (gold lit) state, and a "spot" sound effect is further produced. The hold sound is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once ( In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashes, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In B, unlike the start port light emission effect A, as shown in FIG. 192 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port lights yellow without blinking yellow (blinking gold). By maintaining and controlling the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (lighting in gold color), the state in which the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in gold color) is maintained, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is further emitted from the speaker 67. Does not flow from (holding sound turns off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), since the hold is already full, there is a hold display position for displaying the hold icon. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 192 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 192 As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The lit state will be maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned. When the stop display is displayed and the disengagement is confirmed, the change is terminated and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 192 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the hold is already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold ball does not increase, and the hold sound is a sound effect of "spot". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect B, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in yellow). Even if the number of reserved balls increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 in the state of being lit in gold), the number of reserved balls increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The state of being lit in color) is maintained, and the hold sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to a light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is an aspect, can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emitting effect B, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the game ball enters the first start port 20. As a result, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is blocked. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in yellow lighting (gold lighting). Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect C]
Next, the start port light emitting effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect C. The start port light emitting effect C is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 193 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Each of 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the decorative symbol in FIG. 193 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (B), the decorative substrate for the first starting port is used. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to be lit in white, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .. When the decorative symbol in FIG. 193 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the first in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D). The light emitting mode of the start port 20 flashes white only once, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is used to notify that the number of hold balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20. Flows from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned on).

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 193 (C), the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd is a yellow (gold) star. When changed to the hold icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193 (D), the color becomes the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C in the shape of a yellow (gold) star, that is, the hold icon 9C is attached. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in conjunction with the colored colors, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting. It will be lit in yellow (lit in gold). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .. Before the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd in FIG. 193 (C) changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In this case, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) flashes white only once, and the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In order to notify that the number of holding balls has increased, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned on).

When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the hold icon 9C is held and changed (that is, after the hold change), a white sphere is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 193 (E). The hold icon 9A is displayed, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a stock state without being digested, and the hold icon is full. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port has already been controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit) and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold lit), As shown in FIG. 193 (F), it is mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port without any control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. By maintaining and controlling the full-color LED to be lit in yellow (gold lit), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the yellow lit (gold lit) state, and a "spot" sound effect is further produced. The hold sound is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once ( In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashes, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In C, unlike the start port light emission effect A, as shown in FIG. 193 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port lights yellow without blinking yellow (blinking gold). By maintaining and controlling the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (lighting in gold color), the state in which the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in gold color) is maintained, and the holding sound which is a sound effect of "spot" is further heard in the speaker 67. Does not flow from (holding sound turns off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 193 (G), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 193 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 193. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The lit state will be maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the hold ball has increased. , The hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned. When the stop display is displayed and the disengagement is confirmed, the change is terminated and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the hold is already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold ball does not increase, and the hold sound is a sound effect of "spot". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect C, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (lighting in yellow). Even if the number of reserved balls increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 in the state of being lit in gold), the number of reserved balls increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be lit in yellow (gold lit), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold). The state of being lit in color) is maintained, and the hold sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to a light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is an aspect, can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.

Further, in the start port light emission effect C, when the white spherical hold icon 9C is held and changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the game ball enters the first start port 20. As a result, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is blocked). , The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect D]
Next, the start port light emitting effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining the start port light emitting effect D. The start port light emitting effect D is performed during the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation.

In the start port light emitting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 194 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already has the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started and stopped. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at a high speed. The background image placed behind the decorative symbol is displayed by changing the display mode from the opaque state to the translucent state and fluctuating at high speed while the stop-displayed decorative symbol gradually increases in speed. It can be visually recognized through a translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, it decelerates just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and a temporary stop display or a stop display is displayed (temporary stop display, then stop display). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "1", the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed. To. Along with this, the fluctuation ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which is changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 194 (A), the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. A green smiling sphere hold icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and only one game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of the fluctuation. As a result, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the expected degree of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Represents the difference. For example, of the four hold icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, black spherical hold icon, smiling sphere hold icon, and white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most. The expectation of hit is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smile sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of hit. It has become a thing. The hold icon of the smiling sphere is set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the change in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, FIG. 194. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be turned off, which is the normal light emitting mode, and is provided by special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20. Light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is in a special plating color (for example, silver), which is the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 prevents light from passing through the front surface of the first starting port 20 and is arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) becomes difficult to see, and the smile modeling is hidden. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained in the normal light emitting mode, the smile modeling is maintained in the non-display state.

At this time (that is, when the fluctuation in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation. (As shown in FIG. 194 (B)), in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is heard. It flows from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere having green color displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may be the same color as the green color of the smile sphere hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, or another color with high expectation (for example, red or seven colors (for example, red or seven colors). It may change to rainbow)). When the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon disappears at 9Ad, and as shown in FIG. 194 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is controlled to be lit in the same color as the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and is a decoration arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the member (smiling modeling) is in a state of emitting light in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20 and is arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be lit in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C of the smiling sphere, the smiling face modeling is maintained in the display state.

At this time (that is, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and becomes the hold icon 9C. As shown in D)), if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the holding ball does not increase and the holding sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67. (The music on hold is turned off).

After the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), when one game ball continuously enters the first start port 20 (that is, two game balls continuously enter the first start port 20 one by one). A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 194 (E). The four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a stocked state without being digested, and the hold is full. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port has already been controlled to be lit in the same color as the hold icon 9C, and the first start port 20 has been specially plated on the inside of the front surface of the first start port 20. As a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. Although it is in a state of appearing (that is, the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C. Although it is in a state), the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is not performed at all, and as shown in FIG. 194 (F), the first The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the starting port is maintained and controlled to have the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the decoration arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The state in which the modeling of the member (smile modeling) appears by emitting light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is maintained (that is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) It is easy to see and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C), and the hold sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (hold sound). Is OFF).

As a control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, as described in the starting port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the decorative substrate for the first starting port The full-color LED mounted on the above flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191 (C) and 191), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks in a predetermined color only once ( In FIGS. 191 (C) and 191 (D), the white flashing state is obtained, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In D, unlike the start port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. 194 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is maintained and controlled to be the same color as the hold icon 9C. As a result, as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, a state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C appears. It is maintained (that is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C. In addition, the hold sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 194 (G), the hold display position for displaying the hold icon exists because the hold is already full. Instead, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194 (E). It does not change from the state where it was done. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist because the hold is full, and the hold ball does not increase. Therefore, FIG. 194. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C, and special plating is applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20. As a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. The state of emitting light in the color of (that is, the modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is the hold icon 9C. It is displayed in the same color as the color).

At this time (that is, in FIG. 194 (G), the hold is already full), there is a hold display position for displaying the hold icon even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20. Since the number of reserved balls does not increase without this, it is not necessary to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

When the color of the hold icon 9C changes to another color with high expectation after the start of fluctuation, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port also changes to the hold icon 9C. It changes according to the color of, and becomes the same color as the changed color of the holding icon 9C, and as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, modeling of a decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile modeling). Will change to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C and will appear by emitting light. That is, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned. When the stop display is displayed and the disengagement is confirmed, the change is terminated and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 194 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to turn off, which is the normal light emitting mode, and the first starting port 20 A state in which light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20 due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the color of the special plating (for example, silver) which is the normal light emitting mode. Then, the smile modeling is hidden. At the end of the fluctuation, the hold is already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold ball does not increase, and the hold sound is a sound effect of "spot". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).

In this way, in the start port light emitting effect D, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first start port is controlled to be the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the LED is arranged inside the first start port 20. When the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) is easy to see and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. Even if the number of reserved balls increases due to the ball, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, and the ball is mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port. By maintaining and controlling the full-color LED to be the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling becomes possible. The display state is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 appears by emitting light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state where the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is hidden. When the light emitting mode is changed to the state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the first starting port. Since the smile modeling arranged inside the 20 is maintained in a light emitting mode in which it emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, it is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 to be maintained. The state in which the smile modeling arranged inside the 1 start port 20 emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and improve the interest. Can be planned.

Further, in the start port light emitting effect D, the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C. When the state is set, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is not performed at all (in other words, the game ball enters the first starting port 20). (By blocking the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the ball), the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling becomes easier. It is possible to keep the display state in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in which the smile modeling is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C contributes as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. can do. Further, since the hold sound, which is a “spot” sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the hold sound from interfering with the sound effect or music that flows in connection with the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the start port light emission effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment has a first start port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting a game ball, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start port light emitting effect A. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (reception), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) is changed (FIG. 191 (A)). -In FIG. 191 (D), the first effect of turning off the white light for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), controlling the white lighting again, and blinking white only once) and FIGS. 191 (E) to FIG. In 191 (F), it is possible to execute a second effect that can prevent the execution of the first effect and maintain the light emitting mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle). According to this configuration, when a game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to a predetermined period (for example, 0). It is controlled to turn off for only .5 seconds) and is controlled to turn on white again so that it can change to a light emitting mode in which white blinks only once. When the holding ball does not increase, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 Since it is possible to maintain the lighting in white, it is possible to visually appeal whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J), a first start port 20 (receptacle) capable of accepting a game ball is provided, and the game ball is provided at the first start port 20 (receptacle). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold) in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (D)). The first effect (which is controlled to be lit in color) and lit in yellow (lighted in gold) and the first effect 20 (received) are blocked from executing the first effect in FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (H). A second effect that can maintain the light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the entrance) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepts) the start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, this is maintained because the light emitting mode of the first start port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J), the first start port 20 (receptacle) capable of accepting the game ball is provided, and the game ball is provided at the first start port 20 (receptacle). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold) in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D)). The first effect (which is controlled to be lit in color) and lit in yellow (lighted in gold) and the first effect 20 (received) are blocked from executing the first effect in FIGS. 193 (E) to 193 (H). A second effect that can maintain the light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the entrance) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepts) the start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, this is maintained because the light emitting mode of the first start port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and can improve the interest.
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (J), the game ball has a first start port 20 (reception port) capable of accepting the game ball, and the game ball is at the first start port 20 (reception port). The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (the inside of the first starting port 20 in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (D)). The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) placed in is difficult to see, and the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) appears by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C from the state where the smile modeling is hidden. The first effect (which is in a state) and the light emitting mode (first start port 20) of the first start port 20 (reception port) by blocking the execution of the first effect in FIGS. 194 (E) to 194 (H). It is possible to execute a second effect that can maintain the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the above (a light emitting state in which the model appears by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C). .. According to this configuration, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state where the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is hidden. When the light emitting mode is changed to the state in which the game balls appear, even if the game ball enters (accepts) the first start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the first start port 20 Since the light emitting mode is maintained in the light emitting mode in which the smile modeling arranged inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, this maintained first starting The state in which the smile modeling arranged inside the first starting port 20, which is the light emitting mode of the mouth 20, emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C, contributes as an additional light emitting effect to the effect. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start port light emitting effect A, in the second effect, the number of hold icons 9A is a predetermined number (4). The execution of the first effect is permitted until the number of the hold icons 9A is reached, while the execution of the first effect is blocked after the number of the hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4). Specifically, in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (D), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) is variable (white) until the number of hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4). While it is possible to allow a change in the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the lighting, the lighting is controlled to be white again, and the white blinks only once), FIGS. After the number of hold icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4) in (H), the light emitting mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) can be maintained. According to this configuration, the fact that the number of hold icons 9A has reached a predetermined number (4) is in addition to the hold icons 9A that have reached a predetermined number, and further, the first start port 20 emits light. The aspect can be used to convey to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J) of the start port light emitting effect B, the second effect is a hit as compared with the white spherical hold icon 9A. The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) set with a high degree of expectation becomes the hold icon 9C, allowing the execution of the first effect and the first effect is the first start port. After changing the light emitting mode of 20 (reception) to a specific light emitting mode (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the first starting port 20 (1st starting port 20) The light emission mode of the entrance) is maintained in yellow lighting ((gold color lighting) (specific light emission mode)). Specifically, in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, which has a higher expectation of being a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, is the hold. After becoming the icon 9C and changing the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first effect is executed in FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (H). The light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player a state in which the degree of expectation of hitting is high by the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port).
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIG. 194, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) of the smiling sphere, which is set to have a higher expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, is the hold. After becoming icon 9C and allowing the execution of the first effect and the first effect changes the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receptacle) to a specific light emitting mode (arranged inside the first starting port 20). The modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) becomes difficult to see, and the smile modeling is hidden from the state where the decorative member modeling (smile modeling) appears by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C. After that), the execution of the first effect is blocked, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is held, and the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 is suspended. It is maintained in a light emitting state (specific light emitting mode) in which it emits light in the same color as the icon 9C and appears. Specifically, in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (D), the smile sphere hold icon 9A, which is set to have a higher expectation of being a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, becomes the hold icon 9C. 1 The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 (reception port) is changed from the state where the smiling face modeling is hidden because the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes difficult to see. After changing the state in which (smile modeling) emits light in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the first effect is blocked in FIGS. 194 (E) to 194 (H). Light emission mode of the start port 20 (reception port) (a light emitting state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 appears by emitting light in the same color as the hold icon 9C). To maintain. According to this configuration, a state in which the degree of expectation of hitting is high is suggested to the player by the light emitting mode in which the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) emits light in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J) of the start port light emitting effect C, the second effect is yellow (gold) from the white spherical hold icon 9C. ) When the star-shaped hold icon 9C (specific hold icon) is changed, the first effect allows the execution of the first effect, and the first effect specifies the light emission mode of the first start port 20 (reception). After changing to the light emitting mode of (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) is lit yellow (lighting in yellow). (Golden lighting) (Specific light emission mode)) is maintained. Specifically, in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D), the symbol variation (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) by the holding icon 9C in white sphere is started, and the white sphere When the hold icon 9C changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C, which has a higher expectation of hitting than the white spherical hold icon 9A, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception) lights up in white. After changing from to yellow lighting (gold lighting), in FIGS. 193 (E) to 193 (H), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the light emitting mode (yellow lighting) of the first starting port 20 (reception) is blocked. (Gold lit)) is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player a state in which the degree of expectation of hitting is high by the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port).

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start port light emitting effect A, the first effect is further the first start port 20 (reception). The output of the hold sound (allowable sound) can be executed based on the game ball entering (accepted) in the second effect, and the second effect is further the hold sound when the first effect is allowed. While allowing the output of the (allowable sound), the output of the hold sound (allowable sound) is blocked when the first effect is blocked. Specifically, in FIGS. 191 (C) to 191 (D), in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a sound effect of "spot" is used. A certain music on hold flows from the speaker 67 (the sound on hold is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 191 (E) to 191 (H), even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold display position for displaying the hold icon does not exist and the hold ball does not increase. It is no longer necessary to notify that the number of holding balls has increased, and the holding sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). According to this configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (reception port), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is visually blinked in white. By using both the appealing effect and the auditory effect that the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67, it is possible to convey the increase in the holding ball to the player.
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J), in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (B), for example, the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, at the end of such fluctuation, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", flows from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned ON). On the other hand, in FIGS. 192 (C) to 192 (H), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the first start port 20 No control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the speaker, and the reserved sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. As an additional light emission effect to the effect, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) without any control for notifying that the number of holding balls has increased. In addition to being able to contribute, it is possible to prevent the music from being played in connection with the production by not playing the holding sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", from the speaker 67.
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J), for example, in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D), the decorative symbol starts to change, and when the change starts, the first start port 20 is reached. When a game ball enters, the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C before the first start port 20 is changed. When the game ball enters, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H), when the white spherical hold icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the first start port 20 No control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the speaker, and the reserved sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the white spherical hold icon 9C is held and changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of hitting, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As an additional light emission effect to the effect, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) without any control for notifying that the number of holding balls has increased. In addition to being able to contribute, it is possible to prevent the music from being played in connection with the production by not playing the holding sound, which is the sound effect of "spot", from the speaker 67.
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (J), in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (B), when the change is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, At the end of such fluctuation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is played from the speaker 67 in order to notify that the number of holding balls has increased. (The music on hold is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H), the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is the color of the hold icon 9C. When the display is in the same color, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is not performed at all, and the sound effect is "spot". The music on hold does not flow from the speaker 67 (the sound on hold is turned off). According to this configuration, the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C. At this time, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is not performed at all (, modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20). (Smile modeling) becomes easy to see, and by maintaining the smile modeling in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, it can contribute to the production as an additional light emission effect. By not playing the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "smile", from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the sound effect and music flowing in connection with the production from being disturbed.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the start port light emission effect.
[Modification 1]
Start port light emission effect B of FIGS. 192 (C) to 192 (H), start port light emission effect C of FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H), and start port of FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H). In the light emitting effect D, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "spot", is not played from the speaker 67. However, the hold sound, which is a "spot" sound effect, may be made to flow from the speaker 67. In this case, the volume of the hold sound is adjusted to a volume that is 50% to 90% of the volume of the sound effect or music that is played in relation to the production, for example, so as not to interfere with the sound effect or music that is played in relation to the production. It is preferable to be done.

[Modification 2]
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (H), the color of the hold icon 9A that can be displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad in FIG. 192 (A) is held. When the icon 9A was shifted each time it was digested, there was no change in the color of the hold icon 9A, but it changed to a color with a higher expectation of hitting (for example, changing from white to blue, changing from white to green). You may do so. In this case, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the color of the first start port 20 is changed to the hold icon 9C. It will be the same color as the one attached to.

[Modification 3]
In the start port light emitting effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (H), the white spherical holding icon 9C in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (D) has the highest expectation of hitting yellow (gold). When the icon was changed to the star-shaped hold icon, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), but further changed from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich). ) May be changed. In this case, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)), and the color of the first starting port 20 is the same as the color attached to the hold icon 9C. It becomes a color.

[Modification example 4]
In the start port light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start port light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start port light emission effect D of FIG. 194, when the game ball enters the first start port 20, Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 has been changed, it can also be applied to the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. In this case, a decorative substrate on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (not shown) is mounted is arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, respectively, and the lamp control substrate 107. The light emission is controlled by. The first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 emit light when the full-color LED mounted on these decorative substrates emits light. When the first starting port 20 has a normal specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white, so that the first gate (through chucker) The light emitting mode of the 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is lit in white, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white even in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers. As a result, the light emitting modes of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are lit in white.

On the other hand, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) are further provided. When the decorative member is arranged in front of the decorative substrate on the inside of the front surface of the 29 and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light, the decorative member is passed through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. While the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative members arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is visible, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is turned off. In the state, modeling of decorative members arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 through the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. (Smile modeling) is difficult to see, and a special plating color (for example, silver) can be visually recognized through the front surfaces of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. Further, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off when the power is turned on to the game machine 1. In addition, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers, and the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through) are controlled. It is difficult to see the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the chucker) 29. When the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, in the jackpot production, the first gate is in a state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. Through the front of the (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative members arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be visually recognized. It may be made possible.

[Modification 5]
In the start port light emitting effect B of FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd. When the hold icon 9C was set, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 was changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A was set to have a higher degree of expectation to be a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A. When the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), it is controlled to turn off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from yellow lighting (gold lighting) and turns yellow again (gold lighting). The control to return to (gold-colored lighting) may be repeated only 5 times to blink yellow (gold-colored blinking). Regarding this reason (the reason for changing the light emitting mode of blinking yellow (blinking gold) repeatedly only 5 times), when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (receptacle), the first starting port 20 (the first starting port 20 (blinking gold)) This is because the light emitting mode of the entrance) is different from the change of the light emitting mode in which, for example, the white lighting is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the white lighting is controlled again, and the white blinking only once. In other words, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of hitting is high due to the change in the light emission mode of blinking yellow (blinking gold) repeatedly only 5 times, and the yellow (gold) star shape. Notifying the player that the hold icon 9A has moved to the hold display position 9Cd according to the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (that is, due to the change in the light emission mode of repeatedly blinking yellow (blinking gold) only 5 times). Can be done.

[Modification 6]
In the start port light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start port light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start port light emission effect D of FIG. 194, when the game ball enters the first start port 20, Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 was changed, it can also be applied to the second starting port 21. In this case, a decorative substrate on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted is arranged inside the second starting port 21, and the emission is controlled by the lamp control substrate 107. The second starting port 21 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. When the first starting port 20 has a normal specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to light white, so that the second starting port 21 emits light. The mode is lit in white, and even in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white so that the light emitting mode of the second starting port 21 is white. It will be lit.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, a decorative member is further arranged inside the front surface of the second starting port 21 in front of the decorative substrate, and a full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate. In the state where the light is emitted, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 is visible through the front surface of the second starting port 21, while the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is visible. When the lights are turned off, it is difficult to see the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 through the front surface of the second starting port 21, and the color of the special plating is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21. (For example, silver) is visible. Further, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be turned off, and the jackpot effect and the customer Even in the waiting demonstration effect, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is controlled to be turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21. When the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, in the jackpot effect, the inside of the second starting port 21 is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21 with the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emitting light. The modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged in the above may be made visible.

[Modification 7]
In the start port light emitting effect D of FIG. 194, the inside of the front surface of the first start port 20 is specially plated, and the decorative member is arranged in front of the decorative substrate for the first start port, and the decorative substrate for the first start port is arranged. In the state where the full-color LED mounted on the vehicle emits light, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the first starting port 20, while the first starting. When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the mouth is turned off, it is difficult to see the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. 1 The color of the special plating (for example, silver) can be visually recognized through the front surface of the starting port 20. However, a decorative portion may be provided around the first starting port 20 (for example, the upper side, the right side, the lower side, the left side, etc. of the first starting port 20). The first starting port 20 and the decorative portion may be unitized, and if they are independent parts, the decorative portion is preferably arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting port 20. Inside the decorative part, there is a decorative substrate on which a full-color LED is mounted, and a decorative member that is placed in front of the decorative substrate and is shaped by printing, for example, a character (hereinafter, "modeling of decorative member (character modeling)"). In some cases.) And is housed. The back surface of the decorative portion, that is, the surface facing the decorative portion, is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light so that the front surface of the decorative portion can be transparent. .. The decorative portion may be molded from a colorless and transparent resin and may be shaped, or its surface may be shaped as a smooth surface (flat surface or curved surface). In the state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light, the modeling (character modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the decorative portion can be visually recognized through the front surface of the decorative portion arranged around the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is turned off, modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the decorative portion through the front surface of the decorative portion arranged around the first starting port 20 (character modeling). Is difficult to see, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) can be seen through the front surface of the decorative portion.

[Modification 8]
The start port light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the start port light emitting effect B of FIG. 192, the starting port light emitting effect C of FIG. 193, and the starting port light emitting effect D of FIG. 194 may not include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect K1-1]
A game machine that has an entrance that can accept game balls.
A first effect of changing the light emitting mode of the reception based on the acceptance of the game ball at the reception, and
After allowing the light emitting mode of the entrance to be changed by the execution of the first effect, it is possible to execute the second effect of blocking the execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emitting mode of the reception. Is,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the second effect, execution of the first effect is permissible until the number of hold icons reaches a predetermined number, while the first effect is performed after the number of hold icons reaches a predetermined number. To prevent the execution of
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the second effect, a specific hold icon set with a higher expectation of hitting than the hold icon becomes the hold icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed, and the first effect receives the reception. After changing the light emitting mode of the inlet to a specific light emitting mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented to maintain the light emitting mode of the receiving port in the specific light emitting mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the second effect, when the symbol change due to the hold icon is started and the hold icon changes to a specific hold icon, the first effect is allowed to be executed and the first effect is the entrance. After changing the light emitting mode of the above to a specific light emitting mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented and the light emitting mode of the entrance is maintained in the specific light emitting mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect K1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
Further, the first effect can execute the output of the allowable sound based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance.
The second effect allows the output of the permissible sound when the first effect is allowed, while blocking the output of the permissible sound when the first effect is blocked.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the game machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Moreover, although the above-described embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to perform various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub display device.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (the hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 20 ... 1st starting port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A display means that can display multiple types of images,
Fixing members arranged so that the whole can be seen,
With the first movable member, at least part of which is visibly arranged,
A second movable member that is difficult to see as a whole,
A gaming machine including a third movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see by the fixing member .
At least, the fixing member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the display means. With the third movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the above , it is possible to perform a coalescence effect representing a specific target.
A game machine characterized by that.